JP6304359B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, is provided with a storage tank for storing game balls inside the pachinko gaming machine, for example. The game balls stored in the storage tank are guided to the ball tray on the front portion of the gaming machine through the guide passage portion. Further, a payout execution means such as a rotating body is provided at a midway position of the guide passage portion, and the game ball guided by the guide passage portion is temporarily stopped by the payout execution means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball-entry unit provided in the game area, or in a configuration in which a ball rental device such as a CR unit is provided, a lending operation has been performed on the ball rental device. Then, when the payout executing means is driven and controlled by the control device so as to execute the payout operation, the game ball that has been temporarily stopped is paid out to the ball tray (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-14660 A

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, an act of illegally receiving a game medium is assumed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The above-mentioned problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and the same applies to other gaming machines in which game media is paid out through the payout execution means and the game media is detected by the payout detection means. It is.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress an act of illegally receiving a game medium.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a payout executing means for paying out game media toward a storage portion provided in a front portion of the gaming machine,
It is provided so as to detect game media paid out from the payout execution means toward the storage unit, and detects the game media while detecting the game media while not detecting the game media. A payout detection means for setting the detection state to the medium detection state,
Payout number information storage means for storing payout number information used as information on the number of game media to be paid out;
Drive control means for drivingly controlling the payout execution means so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means is paid out;
Based on the fact that the detection state of the payout detection means has changed from the medium non-detection state to the medium detection state, it is determined that the game medium has been paid out from the payout execution means, and the game medium has been paid out Updating means for updating the number-of-payout information so that it is reflected in the number-of-payout information when it is specified;
In a situation in which the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the drive control means so as to perform a payout operation, the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium non-detection despite the predetermined first timing. A payout restricting means for restricting the payout of game media by the payout executing means when a situation that does not change from the state to the medium detection state occurs;
In the situation where the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state, the detection state of the payout detection means is medium non-detection despite the second timing set as a timing earlier than the first timing. A special situation identifying means for identifying that a special situation that is not in a state occurs,
Number-of-times measuring means for measuring the number of times the special situation has occurred;
An initial value setting means for setting information on the number of times measured by the number of times measurement means to an initial value when a reference period has elapsed;
Means for performing special processing based on the fact that the number of times measured by the number of times measuring means has reached a reference number of times determined as a plurality of times;
Equipped with a,
The initial value setting means is measured by the number counting means even if an event occurs in which the detection state of the payout detection means changes from the medium detection state to the medium non-detection state before the second timing. The number of times information is not set to the initial value .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the act which tries to receive payout of a game medium illegally can be suppressed.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a front door frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of a main body frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a main body frame. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface structure of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the state which removed the main controller unit from the game board. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a main controller unit. It is a front view which shows the structure of a back pack unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a back pack unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the channel | path structure formed inside the dispensing device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process by CPU of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure regarding payout of a game ball. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a 1st input port. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the counter area for prize balls, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a command storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning ball number storage area, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rented ball number storage area, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the payout number counter area, (D) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prize ball table storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process by CPU of a main control board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the processing content of a reading process. It is a flowchart which shows an information determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an input state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a front door frame open | release signal monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball permission signal monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for payment. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball command output process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by CPU of a payout control board. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for full tanks. It is a flowchart which shows a ball useless process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball rental setting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout number setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a payout state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a drive signal output process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning ball permission signal setting process. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode of the output of the prize ball command with respect to a prize ball permission signal. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout monitoring process. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode of monitoring whether abnormality has generate | occur | produced in the payout apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure regarding payout of the game ball in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a timer update process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a detection abnormality counter update process. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode of monitoring whether abnormality has generate | occur | produced in the payout apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure regarding payout of the game ball in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for winning units. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process for prize balls. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode of monitoring whether abnormality has generate | occur | produced in the payout apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode of monitoring whether abnormality has generate | occur | produced in the payout apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control processing in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl detection process for prize balls. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure regarding payout of the game ball in other embodiment.

  First, invention groups that can be extracted from the present embodiment are shown as means n (n = 1, 2, 3,...), And will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Means 1. Payout executing means (rotating body 256, payout motor 257) for paying out game media toward a storage part (upper plate 33, lower plate 34) provided on the front surface of the gaming machine;
Provided so as to detect game media paid out from the payout execution means toward the storage unit, while not detecting the game media, the detection state is set to a non-detection state, and the game media is detected. A payout detection means (payout ball detection sensor 258) that sets the detection state to the medium detection state while
A payout number information storage means (prize ball number storage area 374, rented number storage area 375) for storing payout number information used as information on the number of game media to be paid out;
Drive control means for driving and controlling the payout execution means so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means (drive signal output processing of the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) Etc.)
Based on the fact that the detection state of the payout detection means has changed from one of the non-detection state and the medium detection state to the other, it is determined that the game medium has been paid out from the payout execution means, and the game medium When it is specified that the payout has been paid out, the payout execution update means for updating the payout number information so that it is reflected in the payout number information (step S2104, step S2108, step S2113 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) Etc.)
In a situation where the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state, a special situation has occurred in which the detection state of the payout detection means does not become a non-detection state in spite of a predetermined specific timing. Special situation specifying means for specifying this (function of executing processing such as step S3412 and step S3413 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 1, the payout execution means is drive-controlled so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means is paid out, and the game medium paid out from the payout execution means Is stored in a storage part provided in the front part of the gaming machine. Further, based on the fact that the game medium paid out from the payout execution means toward the storage unit is detected by the payout detection means, and the detection state of the payout detection means is changed from one of the non-detection state and the medium detection state to the other. Thus, the number of game media paid out is reflected in the payout number information.

  In this case, when the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state, and a special situation occurs in which the detection state of the payout detection means does not become the non-detection state despite the specific timing. It is specified in the gaming machine. As a result, for example, even if a fraudulent action is performed to maintain the detection state of the payout detection means in the medium detection state when or when the payout operation of the payout execution means is performed, the fraudulent action is performed. Can be grasped in the gaming machine. And it becomes possible to cope with the said fraudulent act by making the said grasp | ascertainable in a game machine.

  Further, in order to deal with the above fraudulent acts, a configuration is also conceivable in which it is determined that a situation in which the detection state of the payout detection means does not become the medium detection state in a situation where the drive control by the drive control means is performed. . However, in this configuration, it is difficult to distinguish between a case where a failure has occurred in the payout execution means and the payout detection means and a case where the above-mentioned fraudulent activity is being performed. On the other hand, when a failure has occurred in the payout execution means or the payout detection means, the detection state of the payout detection means does not become the medium detection state. Therefore, in the situation where the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state as described above, a special situation has occurred in which the detection state of the payout detection means does not become the non-detection state in spite of the specific timing. By specifying, it is possible to distinguish between a case where a failure has occurred in the payout execution means and the payout detection means and a case where the above fraudulent act is being performed.

  Mean 2. In the means 1, special processing execution means (step in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) that executes predetermined special processing based on the fact that the special situation is specified by the special situation specifying means. A gaming machine further including a function of executing processing such as S3415.

  According to the means 2, when the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state and a special situation occurs in which the detection state of the payout detection means does not become the non-detection state in spite of the specific timing. Is specified in the gaming machine, and special processing is executed based on the specified result. Thereby, it becomes possible to cope with the above fraud.

  As the “special process”, a notification process can be considered. By executing the notification process as a special process, it is possible to notify a game hall manager or the like that an abnormality has occurred regarding the payout of game media. In this case, the notification process is not limited to a configuration in which notification is performed via a display unit, a sound output unit, or the like mounted on the gaming machine. For example, an abnormality signal is sent to a management device provided in the gaming hall. It is good also as a structure which outputs, It is good also as a structure which performs both the alerting | reporting in game machine itself, and the output of the abnormal signal toward the exterior of a game machine. Further, in addition to or instead of the notification process, as a special process, a process for prohibiting the payout of game media may be executed, or a process for prohibiting the progress of the subsequent game may be executed. The same applies to the following means.

Means 3. In the means 2, the special situation specifying means is defined as one of the number of times the special situation specifying means determines that the special situation has occurred until the special situation is resolved after the special situation occurs. The abnormality reference number specifying means for specifying that the number of times specified as the occurrence of the special situation has reached a predetermined abnormality reference number as a plurality of times (step S3414 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322, etc.) The function to execute the process of
The special processing executing means executes the special processing based on the fact that the abnormal reference number has been specified by the abnormality reference number specifying means.

  According to the means 3, the special processing is executed based on the fact that the number of occurrences of the special situation has reached the abnormality reference number. For example, a configuration in which special processing is immediately executed when it is determined that a special situation has occurred is conceivable, but in this case, there is a concern that the special processing may be executed in a situation in which the above fraud is not performed. . In other words, a special situation may occur when a ball clogging occurs around the payout execution means or the payout detection means, and in the configuration in which special processing is executed immediately when it is specified that a special situation has occurred, There is a high possibility that special processing will be executed in a situation where fraudulent activity is not performed. In this case, depending on the processing content of the special processing, there is a concern that it is difficult to perform maintenance for the above situation. On the other hand, when the above fraudulent act is performed, it is considered that the above fraudulent act is repeatedly performed in an attempt to illegally pay out a large number of game media. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means, it is possible to cope with the fraudulent act while suppressing the execution of the special process in a situation where the fraudulent act is not performed.

  In addition, the description that “from the occurrence of the special situation until the special situation is resolved as one number of times that the special situation identification means has identified that the special situation has occurred” The timing for specifying that the special situation is generated by the situation specifying means does not necessarily require that the special situation be resolved. The same applies to the following means.

Means 4. In means 2, a predetermined determination is made as the number of times that the special situation specifying means determines that the special situation has occurred until the special situation is resolved after the special situation has occurred. The number of times of abnormality that specifies that the number of times that the special situation has occurred by the special situation specifying means has reached a predetermined number of times of abnormality as a plurality of times within the range of the reference period for use It further includes a specifying unit (a function for executing processing such as step S3512 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322),
The special processing executing means executes the special processing based on the fact that the abnormal reference number has been specified by the abnormality reference number specifying means.

  According to the means 4, the special process is executed when the occurrence number of the special situation reaches the abnormality reference number within a predetermined reference period for determination. For example, a configuration in which special processing is immediately executed when it is determined that a special situation has occurred is conceivable, but in this case, there is a concern that the special processing may be executed in a situation in which the above fraud is not performed. . In other words, a special situation may occur when a ball clogging occurs around the payout execution means or the payout detection means, and in the configuration in which special processing is executed immediately when it is specified that a special situation has occurred, There is a high possibility that special processing will be executed in a situation where fraudulent activity is not performed. In this case, depending on the processing content of the special processing, there is a concern that it is difficult to perform maintenance for the above situation. On the other hand, when the above fraudulent act is performed, it is considered that the above fraudulent act is repeatedly performed within a predetermined period in an attempt to illegally pay out a large number of game media. On the other hand, according to the above configuration of the present means, it is possible to cope with the illegal act while suppressing the execution of the special process in a situation where the illegal act is not performed.

Means 5. In the means 4, a specific number of times information storage means (first detection abnormality counter area 391) that stores the specific number of times information as information of the number of times specified that the special situation has occurred by the special situation specifying means or information corresponding thereto. , Second detection abnormality counter area 392),
Specific number information updating means (payout control) for updating the specific number information so that the specific result is reflected in the specific number information when the special situation specifying unit specifies that the special situation has occurred A function of executing detection abnormality counter update processing or the like in the CPU 331 of the substrate 322),
In a situation where the specific number of times information is initial information, the specific number of times information is converted into the initial information when the reference period for determination elapses after the special situation specifying means specifies that the special situation has occurred. Initial information return means for returning (function to execute timer update processing in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322);
Further comprising
The abnormality reference number specifying unit is configured so that the number of times the special situation specifying unit specifies that the special situation has occurred based on the specific number of times information is within the range of the determination reference period. A gaming machine characterized by specifying that the game has been reached.

  According to the means 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the special situation has reached a predetermined abnormality reference number as a plurality of times within a predetermined reference period for determination. It is possible to achieve the operational effect of 4.

  In addition, when the reference period for determination elapses after it is specified that the special situation has occurred in the situation where the specific number of times information stored in the specific number of times information storage means is initial information, the specific number of times information Since the specific number of times information stored in the storage means is restored to the initial information, it is possible to monitor whether or not the number of occurrences of the special situation has reached the abnormal reference number within the reference period for determination. It can be performed starting from the occurrence of. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which the reference period for determination is measured regardless of whether or not a special situation has occurred and the specific number of times information is returned to the initial information as the process progresses, the above special situation is within the range of the reference period for determination. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor whether or not the number of occurrences has reached the abnormality reference number.

  Means 6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the specific number-of-times information storage means includes at least “the number of abnormal reference times−1”.

  According to the means 6, monitoring whether or not the number of occurrences of the special situation has reached the abnormality reference number within the range of the determination reference period is at least at different timings within the range of “abnormal reference number −1”. It becomes possible to start. That is, every time the above-mentioned special situation occurs within the range of at least “abnormal reference number −1”, it is possible to start monitoring the abnormal reference number starting from the occurrence of the special situation. This makes it possible to monitor the number of abnormal reference times in an overlapping manner within the range of one special situation, and to suitably monitor the number of abnormal reference times.

Mean 7 The means 6 comprises a plurality of the specific number of times information storage means,
The specific number of times information updating means includes the specific situation information by the special situation specifying means in a situation where there are a plurality of specific number of times information storage means in which the specific number of times information is the initial information among the plurality of specific number of times information storage means. When the specific number information is updated to the specific number information storage means having a relatively high priority according to a predetermined priority, the plurality of specific number information storage means The specific number of times information storage means in which the specific number of times information is updated from the initial information is to update the specific number of times information regardless of the priority order,
The initial information return means individually performs return to the initial information for the plurality of specific number of times information storage means,
The abnormality reference number specifying unit is configured to determine whether the special situation specifying unit performs the special situation based on the fact that the specific number of times information becomes information corresponding to the abnormality reference number of times in any of the plurality of specific number of times information storage units. A gaming machine characterized by specifying that the number of times identified as having occurred has reached the abnormality reference number within the range of the determination reference period.

  According to the means 7, every time the special situation occurs, it is possible to start monitoring the abnormal reference frequency starting from the occurrence of the special situation. This makes it possible to monitor the number of abnormal reference times in an overlapping manner within the range of one special situation, and to suitably monitor the number of abnormal reference times.

Means 8. In the means 2, the game medium is paid out as the number of times that the special situation specifying means determines that the special situation has occurred until the special situation is resolved after the special situation occurs. In the range until the number of times specified by the payout execution update means reaches the reference number of times for determination, the number of times specified that the special situation has occurred by the special situation specifying means is a plurality of times An abnormality reference number specifying means (a function for executing processing such as step S3716 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) for specifying that a predetermined abnormality reference number has been reached is further provided,
The special processing executing means executes the special processing based on the fact that the abnormal reference number has been specified by the abnormality reference number specifying means.

  According to the means 8, the special process is executed when the number of occurrences of the special situation reaches the abnormality reference number within the range until the number of times that the game medium has been paid out reaches the determination reference number. . For example, a configuration in which special processing is immediately executed when it is determined that a special situation has occurred is conceivable, but in this case, there is a concern that the special processing may be executed in a situation in which the above fraud is not performed. . In other words, a special situation may occur when a ball clogging occurs around the payout execution means or the payout detection means, and in the configuration in which special processing is executed immediately when it is specified that a special situation has occurred, There is a high possibility that special processing will be executed in a situation where fraudulent activity is not performed. In this case, depending on the processing content of the special processing, there is a concern that it is difficult to perform maintenance for the above situation. On the other hand, in the case where the above fraud is performed, the above-mentioned number of times that the number of times that the game medium has been paid out reaches the reference number of times for determination is determined in an attempt to illegally pay out a large number of game media. It is thought that cheating is repeated. On the other hand, according to the above configuration of the present means, it is possible to cope with the illegal act while suppressing the execution of the special process in a situation where the illegal act is not performed.

Means 9. In means 2, the game medium is paid out based on the fact that the game content has become a predetermined payout game content,
The payout input update means (CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) updates the payout number information so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout game content is reflected in the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means. Function to execute a prize ball setting process in
A game corresponding to one payout game content is defined as the number of times the special situation specifying means determines that the special situation has occurred until the special situation is resolved after the special situation occurs. The number of times that the special situation specifying means has identified that the special situation has occurred within the range until the payout of the number of game media corresponding to the payout game content is completed in the situation where the medium is being paid out Is further provided with an abnormality reference number specifying means (a function for executing processing such as step S3716 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) for specifying that a predetermined abnormality reference number has been reached as a plurality of times.
The special processing executing means executes the special processing based on the fact that the abnormal reference number has been specified by the abnormality reference number specifying means.

  In the means 9, the special process is executed when the number of occurrences of the special situation reaches the abnormality reference number within a range until the payout of the number of game media corresponding to one payout game content is completed. For example, a configuration in which special processing is immediately executed when it is determined that a special situation has occurred is conceivable, but in this case, there is a concern that the special processing may be executed in a situation in which the above fraud is not performed. . In other words, a special situation may occur when a ball clogging occurs around the payout execution means or the payout detection means, and in the configuration in which special processing is executed immediately when it is specified that a special situation has occurred, There is a high possibility that special processing will be executed in a situation where fraudulent activity is not performed. In this case, depending on the processing content of the special processing, there is a concern that it is difficult to perform maintenance for the above situation. On the other hand, if the above fraudulent act is performed, the above fraudulent act is attempted within a range until the payout of the number of game media corresponding to one payout game content is completed in an attempt to fraudulently pay out a large number of game media. Is considered to be repeated. On the other hand, according to the above configuration of the present means, it is possible to cope with the illegal act while suppressing the execution of the special process in a situation where the illegal act is not performed.

  In particular, when the above fraudulent act is performed, when the game content becomes the payout game content, the above fraudulent act is repeatedly performed in accordance with the payout of the number of game media corresponding to the payout game content. Is assumed. In such circumstances, by monitoring whether the number of occurrences of the special situation has reached the abnormal reference number within the range until the payout of the number of game media corresponding to one payout game content is completed, It is possible to cope with the above fraud appropriately.

  In addition, in the game machine having a game area in which a game ball flows down and a game ball where a game ball can be inserted is installed, the “payout game content” It is good also as entering a ball. Further, in a gaming machine having a pattern display means for executing variable display of a pattern, and a game medium is paid out according to the stop picture of the pattern display means, the stop picture of the pattern display means corresponds to the payout of the game medium. It may be a stop picture.

Means 10. In the means 9, a plurality of types of payout game contents with different payout numbers of game media are set,
Even when the payout input updating means stores the payout number information to be paid out of game media in the payout number information storage means, the number of game media corresponding to the payout game content is the payout number information. To update the number of payouts to be reflected in
A plurality of unit information storage means (winning unit counter area 401) for storing information on the number of game media corresponding to one payout game content as unit information;
Further, when the payout number information is updated by the payout input updating means so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout game content is reflected in the payout number information, information on the number of game media to be updated is obtained. The unit information is updated so as to be reflected in the unit information of one unit information storage unit, and the unit information is a unit information storage unit that is information corresponding to information on the number of game media of one or more. The first unit information update means (CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) that does not update the unit information stored in the unit information storage means even if the payout number update is performed by the payout input update means. Function to execute setting processing for winning units in
When the game medium is paid out for the payout game content corresponding to the unit information stored in the unit information storage means, the number of the game media from which the payout is made is stored in the unit information storage means. A second unit information update unit (a function for executing steps S3704 to S3707 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) to update the unit information so as to be reflected in the information;
The abnormality reference number specifying unit is configured such that the number of game media corresponding to the unit information is “0” after the second unit information updating unit starts updating the unit information stored in the predetermined unit information storage unit. In the range up to, the gaming machine is characterized by specifying that the number of times that the special situation has occurred by the special situation specifying means has reached the abnormality reference number.

  According to the means 10, even when the information on the number of game media corresponding to a plurality of payout game contents is stored in the payout number information storage means, the abnormal reference count is individually monitored for each payout game content. Thus, the effect of the means 9 is preferably exhibited.

Means 11. In means 10, based on the fact that the game content has become the payout game content, information on the number of game media corresponding to the payout game content or information corresponding thereto is stored as game information, and each game information is paid out. With payout game content storage means (award ball counter area 361) for storing game content individually,
In the payout input update means, the number of game media specified based on the game information stored in the payout game content storage means is reflected in the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means. The payout number information is updated as described above, and the game information is stored in the payout game content storage means when the payout number information is information for the game information equal to or greater than a predetermined input update limit number. Even if there is a game machine, the payout number information is not updated.

  According to the means 11, since the number-of-payout information stored in the number-of-payout information storage means is limited to the amount of payout game contents equal to or greater than the input update limit number, the number of unit information storage means, that is, the number of abnormal reference times is monitored. The effect of the means 9 is preferably exhibited while suppressing the storage capacity required for the operation.

Means 12. In the means 2, the specific timing is defined as one of the number of times specified that the special situation has occurred by the special situation specifying unit from the occurrence of the special situation to the cancellation of the special situation. The number of times that the special situation has been identified as occurring by the special situation identification means without interposing a situation in which the detection state of the payout detection means becomes the non-detection state from the medium detection state before, An abnormality reference number specifying means (a function for executing processing such as step S2607 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) for specifying that the abnormality reference number set as a plurality of times has been reached;
The special processing executing means executes the special processing based on the fact that the abnormal reference number has been specified by the abnormality reference number specifying means.

  According to the means 12, the number of occurrences of the special situation occurs without interposing a situation in which the special situation occurs continuously and the detection state of the payout detection means changes from the medium detection state to the non-detection state before the specific timing is reached. When the number reaches the abnormal reference number, special processing is executed. For example, a configuration in which special processing is immediately executed when it is determined that a special situation has occurred is conceivable, but in this case, there is a concern that the special processing may be executed in a situation in which the above fraud is not performed. . In other words, a special situation may occur when a ball clogging occurs around the payout execution means or the payout detection means, and in the configuration in which special processing is executed immediately when it is specified that a special situation has occurred, There is a high possibility that special processing will be executed in a situation where fraudulent activity is not performed. In this case, depending on the processing content of the special processing, there is a concern that it is difficult to perform maintenance for the above situation. On the other hand, when the above fraudulent act is performed, it is considered that the above fraudulent act is repeatedly performed within a predetermined period in an attempt to illegally pay out a large number of game media. On the other hand, according to the above configuration of the present means, it is possible to cope with the illegal act while suppressing the execution of the special process in a situation where the illegal act is not performed.

Means 13. Any one of the means 1 to 12 includes a detection period measuring means (such as a payout specifying counter area 380) for measuring a detection continuation period in which the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state.
The payout execution update means specifies that the game medium has been paid out from the payout execution means when the detection continuation period measured by the detection period measurement means has passed the first detection continuation period,
The gaming machine in which the specific timing is that a second detection continuation period in which the detection continuation period measured by the detection period measurement unit is longer than the first detection continuation period.

  According to the means 13, the detection state of the payout detection means does not immediately specify that the game medium has been paid out because the detection state of the payout detection means becomes the medium detection state, but the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state. By specifying that the game medium has been paid out after the continuation period has passed the first detection continuation period, when the detection state of the payout detection means becomes the medium detection state due to noise or the like, The possibility of being identified as a payout is reduced.

  In this case, according to the present configuration, it is possible to specify that a special situation has occurred by using the configuration for specifying that the game medium has been paid out as described above.

Means 14. In any one of the means 1 to 12, a confirmation means (a function for executing processing such as step S3402 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) for repeatedly checking the detection state of the payout detection means at a predetermined cycle;
Confirmation number storage means (payout specifying counter area 380) for storing information on the number of times the confirmation means has confirmed that the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state;
When the confirmation unit confirms that the detection state of the payout detection unit is the medium detection state, the confirmation number information is updated so that it is reflected in the confirmation number information, and the discharge detection is performed. Confirmation number update means for initializing the confirmation number information when the confirmation means confirms that the detection state of the means is the non-detection state (processing such as step S3406 and step S3407 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) Function to execute)
With
The payout execution update means specifies that the game medium has been paid out from the payout execution means when the number of confirmations corresponding to the confirmation number information reaches a predetermined first confirmation number,
The gaming machine in which the specific timing is that a confirmation count corresponding to the confirmation count information reaches a second confirmation count that is greater than the first confirmation count.

  According to the means 14, the detection state of the payout detection means is not the medium detection state, but it is specified that the game medium is immediately paid out, and the detection state of the payout detection means is in the medium detection state. When the number of confirmations that have been confirmed reaches the first number of confirmations, it is specified that the game medium has been paid out. The possibility of being identified as game media payout is reduced.

  In this case, according to the present configuration, it is possible to specify that a special situation has occurred by using the configuration for specifying that the game medium has been paid out as described above.

Means 15. In any one of the means 1 to 14, the payout execution is performed in a situation where the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the drive control means so as to perform a payout operation, even though a predetermined limit timing is reached. Based on the occurrence of a situation in which it is not specified that the game medium has been paid out from the payout execution means by the update means, a payout restriction means (payout control board) that restricts the payout of game media by the payout execution means 322 CPU 331 further includes a function of executing processing such as step S2609,
The specific timing and the restriction timing are determined before the payout restricting means restricts the payout of the game medium by the payout executing means when the detection state of the payout detecting means is the medium detection state. A gaming machine, characterized in that the special situation specifying means is set so as to specify that the special situation has occurred.

  According to the means 15, in a situation where the payout execution means is driven and controlled so as to perform a payout operation, a situation occurs in which the detection result of the payout detection means does not become the specific detection result despite the limit timing. If so, the payout of game media by the payout executing means is restricted. As a result, for example, a failure of the payout execution means occurs, and it is possible to suppress the payout execution means from continuing the payout operation even though the normal game medium cannot be paid out.

  In this case, when the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state, it is specified that a special situation has occurred before the payout restriction means restricts the payout of the game medium by the payout execution means. As described above, a specific timing and a limit timing are set. As a result, for example, even if a fraudulent action is performed to prevent the game medium from being normally detected by the payout detecting means when or during the payout operation of the payout executing means, The fact that an action is being performed can be grasped in the gaming machine at a timing earlier than the timing at which the payout of game media is restricted. Then, by making it possible to perform the grasp in the gaming machine, it is possible to cope with the illegal act while preventing the normal game medium payout operation in a situation where the illegal act is not performed. .

Means 16. Payout executing means (rotating body 256, payout motor 257) for paying out game media toward a storage part (upper plate 33, lower plate 34) provided on the front surface of the gaming machine;
Provided so as to detect game media paid out from the payout execution means toward the storage unit, while not detecting the game media, the detection state is set to a non-detection state, and the game media is detected. A payout detection means (payout ball detection sensor 258) that sets the detection state to the medium detection state while
A payout number information storage means (prize ball number storage area 374, rented number storage area 375) for storing payout number information used as information on the number of game media to be paid out;
Drive control means for driving and controlling the payout execution means so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means (drive signal output processing of the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) Etc.)
Based on the fact that the detection state of the payout detection means has changed from one of the non-detection state and the medium detection state to the other, it is determined that the game medium has been paid out from the payout execution means, and the game medium When it is specified that the payout has been paid out, the payout execution update means for updating the payout number information so that it is reflected in the payout number information (step S2104, step S2108, step S2113 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) Etc.)
A special condition in which the detection state of the payout detection means does not switch in a situation where the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the drive control means so as to perform the payout operation in spite of a predetermined specific timing. Special situation specifying means for specifying that a situation has occurred (a function of executing processing such as step S3412 and step S3413 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 16, the payout execution means is drive-controlled so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means is paid out, and the game medium paid out from the payout execution means Is stored in a storage part provided in the front part of the gaming machine. Further, based on the fact that the game medium paid out from the payout execution means toward the storage unit is detected by the payout detection means, and the detection state of the payout detection means changes from one of the non-detection state to the other medium detection state. Thus, the number of game media paid out is reflected in the payout number information.

  In this case, in a situation where the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the drive control means so as to perform the payout operation, a special situation occurs in which the detection state of the payout detection means does not switch despite the specific timing. If it is, it is specified in the gaming machine. As a result, for example, even if a fraudulent action is performed to prevent the game medium from being normally detected by the payout detecting means when or during the payout operation of the payout executing means, It can be grasped in the gaming machine that the action is being performed. And it becomes possible to cope with the said fraudulent act by making the said grasp | ascertainable in a game machine.

  The configuration specified in any one of the means 2 to 15 may be applied to the means 16.

Means 17. Payout executing means (rotating body 256, payout motor 257) for paying out game media toward a storage part (upper plate 33, lower plate 34) provided on the front surface of the gaming machine;
A payout detecting means that detects a game medium to be paid out from the payout execution means toward the storage unit, and a detection result becomes a specific detection result in a process of starting detection of the game medium and ending detection of the game medium. (Payout ball detection sensor 258);
A payout number information storage means (prize ball number storage area 374, rented number storage area 375) for storing payout number information used as information on the number of game media to be paid out;
Drive control means for driving and controlling the payout execution means so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means (drive signal output processing of the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) Etc.)
A payout execution updating unit that specifies that a game medium has been paid out based on a detection result of the payout detection unit and updates the payout number information so that the specified number of game media is reflected in the payout number information. (A function for executing processing such as step S2104, step S2108, and step S2113 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322);
In the situation where the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the drive control means so as to perform a payout operation, the detection result of the payout detection means is the specific detection result in spite of the predetermined limit timing. A payout restricting means (a function for executing processing such as step S2609 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) for restricting payout of the game medium by the payout executing means when a situation that does not occur occurs;
In the situation where the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the drive control means so as to perform the payout operation, the payout detection means has a specific timing set as an earlier timing than the limit timing. A special situation specifying means (a function for executing processes such as step S2605 and step S2606 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) for specifying that a special situation in which the detection result does not become the specific detection result has occurred;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 17, the payout execution means is drive-controlled so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means is paid out, and the game medium paid out from the payout execution means Is stored in a storage part provided in the front part of the gaming machine. In addition, when the game medium paid out from the payout executing means toward the storage unit is detected by the payout detecting means, and the payout of the game medium is specified based on the detection result of the payout detecting means, the specified game The number of media is reflected in the payout number information.

  In this case, when the payout execution means is driven and controlled so as to perform the payout operation, there is a situation where the detection result of the payout detection means does not become the specific detection result despite the limit timing. In this case, the payout of game media by the payout executing means is restricted. As a result, for example, a failure of the payout execution means occurs, and it is possible to suppress the payout execution means from continuing the payout operation even though the normal game medium cannot be paid out.

  In addition, in a situation where the payout execution means is driven and controlled so as to perform a payout operation, the detection result of the payout detection means does not become the specific detection result even though the specific timing is earlier than the limit timing. If a situation has occurred, it is identified in the gaming machine. As a result, for example, even if a fraudulent action is performed to prevent the game medium from being normally detected by the payout detecting means when or during the payout operation of the payout executing means, The fact that an action is being performed can be grasped in the gaming machine at a timing earlier than the timing at which the payout of game media is restricted. Then, by making it possible to perform the grasp in the gaming machine, it is possible to cope with the illegal act while preventing the normal game medium payout operation in a situation where the illegal act is not performed. .

  In addition, for example, a fraudulent jig that can be set to be switched between an operation state that prevents the game medium from being accurately detected by the payout detection means and a non-operation state that allows the detection to be accurately performed is used. It is assumed that In this case, the game medium payout is not restricted by switching the fraudulent jig between the operating state and the non-operating state within the range where the game medium payout is not restricted. There is a concern that the act of illegally paying out a large number of game media may be repeated. On the other hand, it becomes possible to cope with the fraud by adopting a configuration capable of specifying that the special situation has occurred.

  Note that “restricting the payout of game media by the payout execution means” not only stops the payout of game media by the payout execution means but also substantially slows down the payout period of the payout execution means. This also includes preventing the withdrawal of the payment. Further, when the payout executing means is a rotating body, the rotating direction of the rotating body is set to the opposite direction to that during the payout operation, and the forward and reverse operations are alternately repeated. . The same applies to the following means.

  In addition, the “specific detection result” may be a detection result that occurs in a state where the payout execution unit is driven and controlled by the drive control unit so as to perform the payout operation. For example, a game medium is paid out. Or a detection result specified by the payout execution updating means. This also applies to the following means.

Means 18. In means 17, the drive control means adjusts the payout period of the game medium by the payout execution means by drivingly controlling the payout execution means at a predetermined period.
Control number storage means (drive counter area 378) for storing, as control number information, information on the number of times drive control of the payout execution means has been performed by the drive control means;
When drive control of the payout execution means is performed by the drive control means, the control count information is updated so that it is reflected in the control count information, and the detection result of the payout detection means is the specified A control number updating means (function for executing processing such as step S2305 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) for initializing the control number information when a detection result is obtained;
With
The limit timing is that a control count corresponding to the control count information reaches a predetermined first control count,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific timing is that a control count corresponding to the control count information reaches a second control count smaller than the first control count.

  According to the means 18, it is possible to specify that a special situation has occurred by using a configuration for specifying the timing at which the game medium payout restriction is started by the payout restriction means. Also, the payout period of the game medium by the payout execution means is adjusted by the number of times of drive control of the payout execution means by the drive control means, and it is configured to identify that a special situation has occurred through the number of times of control. Thus, even if the game medium payout period by the payout executing means is configured in a plurality of stages, each payout is performed using the same software configuration and hardware configuration to identify that a special situation has occurred. It is possible to carry out according to the period.

  The configuration specified in any one of the means 2 to 15 may be applied to the means 17 or 18.

Means 19. Payout executing means (rotating body 256, payout motor 257) for paying out game media toward a storage part (upper plate 33, lower plate 34) provided on the front surface of the gaming machine;
A payout detecting means that detects a game medium to be paid out from the payout execution means toward the storage unit, and a detection result becomes a specific detection result in a process of starting detection of the game medium and ending detection of the game medium. (Payout ball detection sensor 258);
A payout number information storage means (prize ball number storage area 374, rented number storage area 375) for storing payout number information used as information on the number of game media to be paid out;
Drive control means for driving and controlling the payout execution means so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means (drive signal output processing of the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) Etc.)
A payout execution updating unit that specifies that a game medium has been paid out based on a detection result of the payout detection unit and updates the payout number information so that the specified number of game media is reflected in the payout number information. (A function for executing processing such as step S2104, step S2108, and step S2113 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322);
In a situation where the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the drive control means so as to perform a payout operation, the detection result of the payout detection means is the specific detection result in spite of the predetermined specific timing. Abnormal reference number specifying means for specifying that the number of occurrences of a special situation that has not occurred has reached a predetermined abnormal reference number as a plurality of times (function to execute processing such as step S2607 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) When,
Based on the fact that the abnormal reference number has been reached by the abnormal reference number specifying means, special processing execution means for executing a predetermined special process (processing such as step S2608 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322) Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 19, the payout execution means is drive-controlled so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means is paid out, and the game medium paid out from the payout execution means Is stored in a storage part provided in the front part of the gaming machine. In addition, when the game medium paid out from the payout executing means toward the storage unit is detected by the payout detecting means, and the payout of the game medium is specified based on the detection result of the payout detecting means, the specified game The number of media is reflected in the payout number information.

  Also, when the payout execution means is driven and controlled so as to perform a payout operation, and there is a special situation where the detection result of the payout detection means does not become the specific detection result despite the specific timing. Is identified in the gaming machine, and special processing is executed based on the fact that the number of occurrences of the special situation has reached the abnormality reference number. As a result, for example, even if a fraudulent action is performed to prevent the game medium from being normally detected by the payout detecting means when or during the payout operation of the payout executing means, It is possible for the gaming machine to grasp that the act is being performed, and it is possible to deal with the illegal act.

  In addition, for example, a configuration in which special processing is executed immediately when it is determined that a special situation has occurred is conceivable. However, in this case, there is a concern that the special processing may be executed in a situation where the above fraudulent activity is not performed. Is done. In other words, a special situation may occur when a failure occurs in the payout execution means or the payout detection means or when a ball clog occurs around the payout execution means. In the configuration in which the special process is executed immediately, there is a high possibility that the special process will be executed in a situation where the illegal act is not performed. In this case, depending on the processing content of the special processing, there is a concern that it is difficult to perform maintenance for the above situation. On the other hand, when the above fraudulent act is performed, it is considered that the above fraudulent act is repeatedly performed in an attempt to illegally pay out a large number of game media. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means, it is possible to cope with the fraudulent act while suppressing the execution of the special process in a situation where the fraudulent act is not performed.

  Note that the configuration specified in any one of the means 3 to 15 may be applied to the means 19.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball path (inner and outer rail portions 101 and 102) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game component arranged in the game area, and a predetermined passage portion (various sensors) among these game components A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through 152-155).

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  In addition, each said means can solve the following subjects.

  A pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, is provided with a storage tank for storing game balls inside the pachinko gaming machine, for example. The game balls stored in the storage tank are guided to the ball tray on the front portion of the gaming machine through the guide passage portion. Further, a payout execution means such as a rotating body is provided at a midway position of the guide passage portion, and the game ball guided by the guide passage portion is temporarily stopped by the payout execution means.

  The payout executing means is electrically connected to the control device. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering section provided in the game area or a rental device such as a CR unit is provided, a lending operation is performed on the ball rental device. The payout amount information is stored in the control device, and the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the control device so as to execute the payout operation, whereby the game ball that has been stopped is paid out to the ball tray.

  Further, a payout detection sensor (payout detection means) is provided on the downstream side of the payout execution means, and the game ball derived downstream by the payout operation of the payout execution means is detected by the payout detection sensor. The control device grasps the number of game balls paid out based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and when the number of game balls corresponding to the payout number information is paid out, the payout operation of the payout execution means End.

  Further, ball clogging may occur at the position of the payout executing means or at the upstream side of the payout executing means. In this case, the game ball is not detected by the payout detection sensor in spite of the drive control process being executed in the control device so that the payout operation is executed by the payout executing means. .

  On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-14660), when the above-described state continues for a predetermined period, the control device uses the payout execution means. A restriction process for restricting the payout operation is executed. The restriction process includes a process of stopping the payout operation of the payout executing means. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, as the restriction process, the payout executing means performs a retry operation before stopping the payout operation of the payout executing means. As the retry operation, for example, when the payout execution means is a rotating body, the rotating body is rotated in the direction opposite to the direction in which the payout operation is performed, or the forward direction and the reverse direction are alternately repeated. There is something.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine, when the payout operation of the payout executing means is performed or in a situation where the payout execution means is being performed, the payout detection sensor cannot normally detect the game ball. An improper act is assumed in which more game balls are paid out than the number corresponding to the payout number information stored in the device.

  The fraudulent act will be described by taking as an example a case where a proximity sensor that converts a magnetic field change caused by a game ball passing through a detection unit into an electrical signal and outputs the signal is used as a payout detection sensor. In this fraudulent act, for example, a fraudulent jig is arranged at the position of the payout detection sensor from the ball tray side or the like. The fraudulent jig can generate a magnetic field, and the magnetic field is generated by the fraudulent jig, so that the gaming ball is passed to the detection part even though the gaming ball passes through the detection part. If it stays, the payout detection sensor will falsely detect.

  On the other hand, the control device changes the electric signal at the timing when the detection of the game ball is started by the payout detection sensor (for example, rise of the electric signal) or the electric at the timing when the detection of the game ball is ended by the payout detection sensor. In the configuration that specifies that one game ball has been paid out due to a change in signal (for example, the fall of an electrical signal), if the detection state of the payout detection sensor is set as described above by the fraudulent jig, Even though a large number of game balls are actually passing through the detection unit, the control device cannot grasp the passage of the large number of game balls, and the payout operation of the payout executing means is continued. This state is continued until the restriction process is executed. In this case, in a configuration in which the period until the restriction process is executed is set to be relatively long, a large number of game balls have been paid out so far. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine in which the restriction process is not executed, more game balls are paid out due to the fraud.

  Furthermore, a tool that can be set to be switched between an operation state that prevents the game ball from being accurately detected by the payout detection sensor and a non-operation state that allows the detection to be accurately performed is used as the fraud jig. It is assumed that In this case, the restriction process is not executed by switching the fraudulent jig from the operating state to the non-operating state at a timing before the restriction process is executed. Then, at the timing when the fraudulent jig is switched from the operating state to the non-operating state, the control device can grasp the passing of one game ball, but it detects the payout until just before the restriction process is executed. The act of making the detection of the game ball impossible by the sensor is repeated for the number corresponding to the payout number information.

  The above problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and the same applies to other gaming machines in which game media is paid out through the payout execution means and the game medium is detected by the payout detection means. It is.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a ball lending device (for example, CR unit) Y is provided on the side of the outer frame 11. A card insertion slot H is provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y so that a number of game balls corresponding to the amount stored in the card can be lent by inserting the card into the card insertion slot H. It has become. In addition, what is inserted into the ball lending device Y when receiving the lending of the game ball is not limited to the card, and may be cash or a coin in which cash information is stored.

  The gaming machine main part 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. The main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the main body frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 1 to 3 are referred to, and FIG. 5 is referred to for the configuration of the back surface of the front door frame 14. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the front door frame 14.

  The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. A window portion 21 is formed on the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially oval shape and is fitted with a transparent glass 22. Around the window portion 21, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. For example, an annular illumination part 23 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 23, lighting or blinking is performed in accordance with a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 24 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 23 and at the uppermost part of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that is turned on while the prize ball is being paid out on the left and right sides. A ball lamp portion 25 is provided. In addition, a speaker unit 26 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 25 to output a sound effect corresponding to the gaming state. Further, a pair of left and right payout display lamp units 27 is provided between the speaker unit 26 and the error display lamp unit 24.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the window portion 21, the upper plate 33, and the lower plate 34 are integrated with the front door frame 14. In the conventional pachinko machine, at least the window part and the lower plate are provided as separate units, and the window part can be rotated independently with respect to the lower plate. There was a boundary between the units. In this case, an illegal act performed by inserting a fraudulent jig or the like from the boundary is assumed. In addition, a fraud suppression structure can be provided at the boundary between the units in order to suppress such fraud, but this leads to a complicated configuration. Further, it is not preferable in design that a boundary is generated in the front portion of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, since the window portion 21, the upper plate 33, and the lower plate 34 are integrated with the front door frame 14 as described above, a boundary is generated between the window portion 21 and the lower plate 34. And the above inconvenience is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a ball lending operation device 36 is disposed in the upper bulging portion 31. The ball lending operation device 36 is provided with a ball lending button 37, a return button 38, and a frequency display unit 39. With a card or the like inserted into the ball lending device Y, the ball lending operation device 36 can perform a ball lending operation, a card return operation, and confirmation of the card frequency. That is, the ball lending button 37 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is paid out as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. The return button 38 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the ball lending apparatus Y. The frequency display unit 39 displays remaining amount information such as a card.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is formed of a synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper dish passage 51 that communicates with the upper dish 33 and a front door side lower dish passage 52 that communicates with the lower dish 34. In the passage forming unit 50, a receiving portion 53 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at an upper corner portion thereof, and the receiving portion 53 is divided into left and right portions by a partition wall 54, whereby the front door side upper plate is formed. A passage 51 and an entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage 52 are formed. The upstream side of the front door side upper dish passage 51 and the front door side lower dish path 52 are connected to a game ball distributing section described later, and the game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish path 51 are guided to the upper plate 33, The game balls that have entered the door-side lower dish passage 52 are guided to the lower dish 34.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the passage forming unit 50 is provided with a full tank detection sensor 59 so as to detect a game ball passing through the front door side lower dish passage 52. The full tank detection sensor 59 is configured by a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range is detected and output as an electric signal. The full tank detection sensor 59 is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. .

  The full tank detection sensor 59 outputs an electrical signal to a payout control device 242 described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting.

  The payout control device 242 specifies whether or not the lower tray 34 is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor 59. Specifically, when the detection state of the game ball in the full tank detection sensor 59 is continued until a predetermined period elapses, the lower tray 214 is specified as being full. When the payout control device 242 specifies that the lower tray 214 is full, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 224 is stopped. As a result, when the lower tray 214 is in a full state and game balls are connected to the position of the full tank detection sensor 59 in the front door side lower tray passage 52, payout of further game balls is stopped. The stop of the payout is canceled based on the fact that the full state of the lower plate 214 is canceled and the game ball is no longer detected by the full tank detection sensor 59. Further, when the dispensing control device 242 specifies that the lower tray 214 is full, a notification process corresponding to that is executed.

  Protrusion shafts 61 and 62 are provided on the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 5) on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts 61 and 62 constitute an assembly mechanism for the main body frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook metal fittings 63 extending rearward are arranged in the vertical direction on the rotating front end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 63 constitute a locking mechanism for the main body frame 13.

  Next, the main body frame 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 6 is a front view of the main body frame 13.

  The main body frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 71 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. Support metal fittings 72 and 73 are attached to an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 6) on the front surface of the resin base 71. Although illustration is omitted, shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 72 and 73, and the projecting shafts 61 and 62 of the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shaft holes, so that the front door with respect to the main body frame 13. The frame 14 is rotatably supported.

  Insertion holes 74 for inserting the metal fittings 63 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front end side (right side in FIG. 6) on the front surface of the resin base 71. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a locking device for locking the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the main body frame 13. Accordingly, the front door frame 14 is locked to the main body frame 13 so as not to be opened by the hook metal 63 being locked to the locking device via the insertion hole 74.

  A cylinder lock 75 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 71. The cylinder lock 75 is integrated with the locking device. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 13. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 is turned counterclockwise, the lock of the main body frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 6, a front door frame opening switch (front body opening) that detects whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened (or closed) is disposed above the resin base 71. Detection means) 78 is provided. The front door frame opening switch 78 has a pin that can be projected and retracted from the front surface of the resin base 71. When the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the main body frame 13, the pin is pushed in and the front door frame 14 is closed. When the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the main body frame 13, the pin returns to the protruding position and the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected.

  Incidentally, the front door frame opening switch 78 outputs a front door frame opening signal to a main controller 162 described later when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state, Stop outputting the front door frame opening signal. However, the signal output mode is not limited to this, and one of the HI level signal and the LOW level signal is output when the front door frame 14 is open, and the other is output when the front door frame 14 is closed. Also good.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 76 is formed at the center of the resin base 71. A game board 81 is detachably attached to the resin base 71. The game board 81 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 81 is exposed to the front surface side of the main body frame 13 through the window hole 76 of the resin base 71.

  Here, the structure of the game board 81 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 81 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 82, a variable winning device 83, an upper operating port 84a, a lower operating port 84b, a through gate 85, a variable display unit 86, and the like. Three general winning ports 82 are provided, two on the left side of the game board 81 and one on the right side of the game board 81. When a game ball enters the general winning port 82, the variable winning device 83, and the operation ports 84a and 84b, it is detected by a detection sensor described later, and a predetermined number of award balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 87 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 81, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 87. The game board 81 is provided with a large number of nails 88 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill.

  The variable display unit 86 is provided with a symbol display device 91 that variably displays symbols with a winning at the operation ports 84a and 84b as a trigger. The variable display unit 86 is provided with a center frame 92 so as to surround the symbol display device 91. A first specific lamp portion 93 and a second specific lamp portion 94 are provided on the center frame 92. Reserving lamp portions 95 and 96 are provided at the upper and lower portions of the center frame 92, respectively. The lower holding lamp unit 95 corresponds to the symbol display device 91 and the first specific lamp unit 93. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the operation port 84 is held up to four times, and the holding lamp unit 95 is turned on. The number of reserved items is displayed. The upper holding lamp unit 96 corresponds to the second specific lamp unit 94, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 85 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the holding lamp unit 96. It has become so.

  The symbol display device 91 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 91, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled up and down. When a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, a special gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot) occurs.

  In the first specific lamp section 93, the emission color is switched in a predetermined order using a winning at the operation ports 84a and 84b as a trigger, and a big hit is generated when the display is stopped in a predetermined color. Further, in the second specific lamp section 94, the emission color is switched in a predetermined order triggered by winning of the game ball to the through gate 85, and when the stop color is displayed in a predetermined color, the lower operation port The electric accessory 89 associated with 84b is opened for a predetermined time.

  By the way, the lower operating port (lottery opportunity passage part or lottery opportunity entrance part) 84b is in an open state (opening and closing type entrance assisting device (entry assisting means) or openable member 89 (opening and closing means)). In the case of (assist state), it becomes possible to enter the ball or to easily enter the ball, and in the closed state (non-assisting state), it becomes impossible to enter or difficult to enter.

  The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 83 is a closed state in which the open / close door as the opening / closing member (opening / closing means) is normally unable to win (enter) or prevent winning (entering). Thus, the game ball can be switched to a predetermined open state in which it is easy to win a prize (win) in the case of a big win. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 83, the variable winning device 83 repeats a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. What is opened is common.

  An inner rail portion 101 and an outer rail portion 102 are attached to the game board 81, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 101 and the outer rail portion 102. A game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

  The game ball launching mechanism 110 is attached below the window hole 76 in the resin base 71 as shown in FIG. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes an electromagnetic solenoid 111, a launch rail 112, and a ball feed mechanism 113, and the output shaft of the solenoid 111 moves in the expansion / contraction direction by the input of an electrical signal to the solenoid 111. Then, the game ball placed on the firing rail 112 is launched toward the game area by the ball feeding mechanism 113.

  There is a gap of a predetermined interval between the inner rail rails 101 and 102 attached to the launch rail 112 and the game board 81, and below this gap is formed in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. A foul ball passage 55 is provided. Therefore, if the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the upper part of the game area and returns to the guide rail constituted by the inner and outer rail portions 101 and 102, the foul ball is Enter the foul ball passage 55. The foul ball path 55 communicates with the front door side lower dish path 52, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball path 55 are discharged to the lower dish 34.

  In the resin base 71, a passage forming portion 121 is provided on the left side of the firing rail 112 through the resin base 71 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 3, a main body side upper dish path 122 and a main body side lower dish path 123 are formed in the passage forming portion 121. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish passage 123 communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. A receiving portion 53 of a passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming portion 121, and a front door side upper tray passage 51 is below the main body side upper tray passage 122. The front door side upper dish passage 51 is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage 123.

  In the resin base 71, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper dish path 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123 is attached below the passage forming portion 121. The opening / closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft 125 provided at the lower end thereof so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction, and further urged to a front position where the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123 are closed. An urging member is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the main body frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, and closes the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state in which the game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage 122 or the main body side lower dish passage 123, it is possible to prevent the stored balls from spilling down. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path 122 and the front door side upper dish path 51 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path 123 and the front door side lower dish path 52 communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the main body frame 13 will be described. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the main body frame 13.

  A locking device 131 is provided on the rotation tip side (the left side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the resin base 71, and the locking device 131 is interlocked with the key operation on the cylinder lock 75, and the main body frame 13 and the front door. The frame 14 is unlocked.

  A bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the resin base 71. A bearing portion 133 is formed on the bearing bracket 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the main body frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, a fastening hole 134 for fastening the back pack unit 15 to the main body frame 13 is provided on the back surface of the resin base 71.

  A plurality of locking fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 71, and the game board 81 is attached to the resin base 71 by the locking fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 81 will be described. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the game board 81 as seen from the rear, and FIG. 10 is a rear view showing a state in which the main controller unit 160 is removed from the game board 81.

  The variable display unit 86 disposed in the center of the game board 81 is provided with a frame cover 141 made of synthetic resin that covers the center frame 92 from the back, and is provided rearward with respect to the frame cover 141 from the rear side. The above-described symbol display device 91 is attached, and a display control device for driving the symbol display device is attached (not shown). The symbol display device 91 and the display control device are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction (the symbol display device is in front and the display control device is in rear), and the sound lamp control device unit 142 is mounted on the rear side. The sound lamp control device unit 142 includes a sound lamp control device 143 and a mounting table 144, and the sound lamp control device 143 is mounted on the mounting table 144.

  The sound lamp control device 143 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound, lamp display, and display control device in accordance with instructions from a main control device to be described later, and the sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 145.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a collective board unit 150 is provided below the variable display unit 86 on the back surface of the game board 81. The collective board unit 150 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of game balls in various winning ports, and the like. .

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collective plate unit 150 collects at a single location on the downstream side corresponding to the game board opening of the general winning port 82, the variable winning device 83, and the operating ports 84a and 84b. A passage 151 is formed. Therefore, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 82 and the like gather below the game board 81 via the collection passage 151. Below the game board 81 is a discharge passage which will be described later, and the game balls gathered below the game board 81 by the collection passage 151 are led out into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 87 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any winning port is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 87.

  Explaining about the winning detection mechanism, the collective board unit 150 is provided with winning hole sensors 152a to 152c at positions corresponding to the general winning holes 82 on the front side of the game board 81, respectively. A count sensor 153 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 83, and operating port sensors 154a and 154b are provided at positions corresponding to the operating ports 84a and 84b, respectively. Further, a gate sensor 155 that detects a game ball passing through the through gate 85 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 86 outside the collective board unit 150. These winning balls are detected by sensors 152 to 155 as ball detecting sensors (game medium detecting means). These sensors 152 to 155 output electric signals to a main controller 162 described later. Specifically, an HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting.

  A main controller unit 160 is mounted on the back of the game board 81 so as to cover the collective board unit 150 from the rear side. The configuration of main controller unit 160 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main controller unit 160.

  The main control unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161, and the main control unit 162 is mounted on the mounting base 161. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened by a sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. Five sealing portions 164 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened. However, the box base and the box cover can be inserted by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the sealing portion 164. And can be unopened. The sealing process by the sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been performed. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the five sealing portions 164. When opening the board box 163 such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is provided. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 165 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 165 have a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of coupled pieces 166 formed on the mounting table 161, and the coupling pieces 165 and the coupled pieces 166 provide a space between the board box 163 and the mounting table 161. Sealing is performed.

  Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described. FIG. 12 is a front view of the back pack unit 15, and FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the back pack unit 15.

  The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board 203, and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and includes a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 86.

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

  The base portion 211 is provided with a main body frame opening switch (main body opening detecting means) 217 for detecting whether or not the main body frame 13 is opened (or closed) outside the external terminal plate 213. It has been. When the body frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the metal contact of the switch 217 is closed and the closing of the body frame 13 is detected. When the body frame 13 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, the metal contact is opened. Thus, the opening of the main body frame 13 is detected.

  Incidentally, the main body frame opening switch 217 outputs a main body frame opening signal to a main controller 162 described later when the main body frame 13 is in an open state, and the main body frame opening signal when the main body frame 13 is in a closed state. Stop the output of. However, the output mode of the signal is not limited to this, and one of the HI level signal and the LOW level signal may be output when the main body frame 13 is in the open state, and the other may be output when the main body frame 13 is in the closed state. Good.

  Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 13. In addition, the base 211 is provided with a fastener 215 for fastening to a fastening hole 134 provided in the main body frame 13, and the main body can be obtained by fitting the fastening 215 into the fastening hole 134. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. That is, a tank 221 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 201, and the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail 222 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the case rail 223 is provided with a ball non-detection sensor 223a so as to detect a game ball connected from the tank 221 to the payout device 224 through a passage in the case rail 223. The ball non-detection sensor 223a is configured by a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range is detected and output as an electric signal. Note that the ball non-detection sensor 223a is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. .

  The ball non-detection sensor 223a outputs an electrical signal to a payout control device 242 described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting.

  The payout control device 242 specifies whether or not the tank 221 is in a no-sphere state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor 223a. Specifically, when the non-detected state of the game ball in the ball non-detection sensor 223a is continued until a predetermined period elapses, the tank 221 is identified as having no ball. When the payout control device 242 specifies that the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 224 is stopped. This prevents the dispensing device 224 from continuing to operate even when the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball. The stop of the payout operation is released when the ball 221 in the tank 221 is released and the game ball is detected by the ball non-detection sensor 223a. Further, when the dispensing control device 242 specifies that the tank 221 is in a ball-free state, a notification process corresponding to the tank 221 is executed. Note that even when a ball clogging occurs in the tank 221 and a game ball does not flow to the payout device 224 side, it is specified that there is no ball.

  The case rail 223 is provided with a ball removal operation switch 223b. For example, when the game balls stored in the tank 221 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, the ball removal operation switch 223b is pressed when all the game balls on the case rail 223 are discharged, and the case rail 223 and its downstream side The game balls stored in the game can be discharged. Note that the installation location of the ball removal operation switch 223b is not limited to the case rail 223, and may be installed, for example, in the dispensing control device 242.

  The payout device 224 pays out game balls. Here, the configuration of the payout device 224 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a passage structure formed inside the dispensing device 224. In FIG. 14, a game ball flowing down inside the payout device 224 is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  In the housing 251 of the payout device 224, a game ball inlet 252 for taking in a game ball supplied from the case rail 223 is formed at an upper end thereof, and a game that has entered from the game ball inlet 252 inside. A game ball passage 253 for passing a ball is provided.

  The game ball passage 253 communicates with a game ball outlet 254 formed at the lower end of the housing 251, and the game balls entering from the game ball inlet 252 flow down one by one toward the game ball outlet 254. A storage portion 255 whose passage width is widened to the left and right is provided in an intermediate portion of the game ball passage 253, and the rotating body 256 is stored in the storage portion 255. The center of the rotating body 256 is fixed to the output shaft 257 a of the payout motor 257 accommodated in the housing 251.

  The payout motor 257 is configured by a stepping motor, and the output shaft 257a is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise or counterclockwise as viewed in FIG. 14). In this embodiment, a four-phase stepping motor is used, but various stepping motors such as a two-phase stepping motor can be used without being limited to four phases.

  The payout motor 257 is driven and controlled by a CPU provided in the payout control device 242 through a motor driver provided in the payout control device 242 described later. Specifically, when a one-pulse drive signal (also referred to as an excitation signal or an excitation pulse; hereinafter the same) is given from the CPU to the motor driver, the excitation state of the payout motor 257 is switched, and the output shaft 257a advances one step. The payout motor 257 is set so that the output shaft 257a advances 60 steps when the drive signal of 60 pulses is given from the CPU, and the output shaft 257a rotates once. Then, when the output shaft 257a rotates once, that is, when a 60-pulse drive signal is output from the CPU of the payout control device 242, the rotating body 256 rotates once.

  Concave portions 256 a are formed at two positions on the periphery of the rotating body 256 at intervals of 180 °. The concave portion 256a has a curved surface, and the curvature thereof is approximately the same as the curvature of the game ball. Further, the distance between the portion between the recesses 256a on the periphery of the rotating body 256 and the passage wall of the housing portion 255 is shorter than the diameter dimension of the game ball, whereas the passage between the recess 256a and the housing portion 255. The distance to the wall is longer than the diameter dimension of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 253 reaches the recess 256 a of the rotating body 256, the gaming ball is led to the downstream side as the rotating body 256 rotates.

  Here, as described above, since the 60-pulse drive signal is output from the CPU of the payout control device 242, the rotating body 256 makes one rotation, and thus the rotating body 256 has recesses 256a formed at two positions at 180 ° intervals. In the configuration, one game ball is led out to the downstream side by the rotating body 256 and then a 30-pulse drive signal is given to the payout motor 257, whereby the next game ball is led out to the downstream side. Note that the number of pulses of the drive signal necessary for one rotation of the rotating body 256 (the number of steps of the rotating body 256) and one gaming ball is derived downstream, and then the next gaming ball is derived downstream. The number of pulses of the drive signal required to be performed (the number of steps of the rotating body 256) is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  The game ball passage 253 is provided with a payout ball detection sensor 258 having a substantially flat plate shape at a position downstream of the housing portion 255. The payout ball detection sensor 258 is configured by a known magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and converts a magnetic field change caused by the game ball passing through the through hole of the detection unit 258a into an electric signal and outputs the electric signal. The number of game balls paid out through the payout device 224 can be confirmed by the payout ball detection sensor 258.

  The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224. The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening 226 has been described above. The center side opening 227 communicates with the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage 52 through the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage 51. The outer opening 228 is formed to communicate with the discharge passage.

  A backpack substrate 229 is installed in the dispensing mechanism unit 202. The back pack substrate 229 is supplied with, for example, a main power of AC 24 volts, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 229a.

  A discharge passage board 203 and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage 231 opened rearward on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage 231 is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage 231 is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led out to the discharge passage 231 from the above-described collection passage 151 or the like passes through the discharge passage 231 so as to be pachinko. It is discharged outside the machine 10.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241 on which a payout control device 242, a power source and launch control device 243, and a ball rental connection terminal plate 249 are mounted. The payout control device 242, the power supply and launch control device 243, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 249 are arranged so that the payout control device 242 and the ball lease connection terminal plate 249 are behind the pachinko machine 10 and the power supply and launch control device 243 is the pachinko machine 10. They are placed one behind the other so as to be in front.

  The payout control device 242 accommodates a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 in a colorless and transparent substrate box 244. The payout command signal from the payout control device 242 to the payout device 224 is relayed by the back pack substrate 229 described above. The payout control device 242 is provided with a state return switch 245. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is eliminated. Further, a 7-segment display 242a is mounted on the payout control board, and the display content of the 7-segment display 242a can be visually recognized through the substrate box 244 by opening the main body frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11. ing.

  The power source and launch control device 243 includes a power source and launch control board housed in the board box 246, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and further a game ball by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 41 is performed. Further, the power and launch control device 243 is provided with a RAM erase switch 247. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the interruption is stored and held, but when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 247 is pressed, the RAM data is initialized. It is like that.

  The ball lending connection terminal plate 249 is electrically connected to the ball lending device Y, the payout control device 242 and the ball lending operation device 36 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and mainly takes in the command of the ball lending operation by the player and uses it. This is output to the payout control device 242.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. In FIG. 15, a power supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and a signal line is indicated by a solid line arrow.

  A main control board 301 provided in the main controller 162 incorporates a main control circuit 302 and a power failure monitoring circuit 303 (power failure monitoring circuit). The main control circuit 302 is equipped with a CPU 311.

  The CPU 311 temporarily stores various control programs executed by the CPU 311 and a ROM 312 (non-volatile storage means) that stores fixed value data, and various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 312. A RAM 313 (volatile storage means) which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated. Note that some or all of the CPU 311, the ROM 312, and the RAM 313 may be provided as separate chips.

  The RAM 313 is configured to store and hold information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, by storing and holding power from the power and launch control board 321 provided in the power and launch control device 243.

  The CPU 311 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the CPU 311, a power failure monitoring circuit 303 provided on the main control board 301, a payout control board 322 provided on the payout control device 242, and other sensor groups are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control board 321 is connected to the power failure monitoring circuit 303, and power is supplied to the CPU 311 (main control circuit 302) via the power failure monitoring circuit 303.

  On the other hand, a power failure monitoring circuit 303, a payout control board 322 and a relay terminal board 323 are connected to the output side of the CPU 311. Various commands such as a prize ball command are output to the payout control board 322. Various commands and the like are output from the main control circuit 302 to the sound lamp control board 324 provided in the sound lamp control device 143 via the relay terminal plate 323.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 303 relays between the main control circuit 302 and the power source and launch control board 321, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power source and launch control board 321. When this voltage is less than 22 volts, it is determined that the power supply has been cut off, and a power failure signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 302.

  The payout control board 322 controls payout of prize balls and the like by the payout device 224. The CPU 331 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 332 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 331, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 333 that is used as a work memory or the like. Note that some or all of the CPU 331, the ROM 332, and the RAM 333 may be provided as separate chips.

  The CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is provided with an input / output port. A main control circuit 302, a power and launch control board 321, and a back pack board 229 are connected to the input side of the CPU 331. Further, the main control circuit 302 and the back pack substrate 229 are connected to the output side of the CPU 331.

  The power supply and launch control board 321 includes a power-on power supply unit 321a and a launch control unit 321b. The power-on power supply unit 321a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control circuit 302, the payout control board 322, etc., and the generated operating power is indicated by a double line arrow. This is supplied to the main control circuit 302 and the payout control board 322 through the path. As its outline, the power-on power supply unit 321a takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied via the back pack substrate 229, + 12V power for driving various sensors, motors, etc., + 5V power for logic, etc. And supplies these + 12V power and + 5V power to the main control circuit 302, the payout control board 322, and the like.

  The launch control unit 321b is responsible for launch control of the game ball launching mechanism 110 in accordance with the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 by the player, and the game ball launching mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. The

  The power source and launch control board 321 is equipped with a power source unit 321c for power interruption. The power supply unit for power interruption 321c is composed of a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit for power supply 321a is used. Charged. Further, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or in a power cut-off state such as when a power failure occurs in a commercial power supply (when power supply from an external power supply is cut off), the main power unit 321c is discharged from the power cut-off. Memory holding power is supplied to the RAM 313 of the control board 301. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the RAM 313 is stored and held without being erased while the power for storing and holding is supplied from the power supply unit 321c for power interruption.

  Incidentally, the capacity of the power supply unit 321c for power interruption is relatively large, and information stored in the RAM 313 before the power is shut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). The power supply unit for power interruption is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power in the power supply means for power interruption when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  Further, the power supply and launch control board 321 is provided with a power failure processing power supply unit different from the power interruption power supply unit 321c. In the power supply and launch control board 321, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit for power failure processing discharges for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing described later. The output of 5 volts, which is the drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. Thereby, the main control circuit 302 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The sound lamp control board 324 controls the various lamp units 23 to 25, the speaker unit 26, and the display control device 325. The CPU 341 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 342 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 341, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 343 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The CPU 341 of the sound lamp control board 324 is provided with an input / output port. The main control circuit 302 is connected to the input side of the CPU 341 by relaying to the relay terminal plate 323. Based on various commands output from the main control circuit 302, various lamp units 23 to 25, the speaker unit 26, and The display control device 325 is controlled. The display control device 325 controls the symbol display device 91 based on a display command input from the sound lamp control board 324.

  Next, display contents of the symbol display device 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the symbol display device 91, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are set. Each symbol row is composed of, for example, a main symbol with numbers “0” to “9” and a sub-symbol made of, for example, a diamond-shaped picture. Each main symbol and sub-design constitute a first symbol. In each symbol row, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and sub symbols are arranged between the main symbols. That is, each symbol row is provided with a total of 20 first symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols. In the symbol display device 91, 20 first symbols are variably displayed so as to scroll from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol display device 91 is configured to display the first symbol of the upper, middle, and lower levels for each symbol row. Therefore, the symbol display device 91 displays a total of nine first symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In addition, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set in the symbol display device 91. Then, the variable display stops in the order of left symbol sequence → right symbol sequence → middle symbol sequence, and at the time of the stop, it is a combination of jackpot symbols on any active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) If you arrange it, a big hit video will be displayed as a big hit.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 311 in the main control device 162 uses various counter information in the game to make a big hit lottery, set the emission color of the first specific lamp unit 93, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 91, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot A reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 91 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation pattern selection of the symbol display device 91 The period for switching the colors displayed on the first variation type counter CS1 to be used and the first specific lamp unit 93 is determined. A second change type counter CS2 that has been decided to use the left column, the middle column and the right column the off each off symbol counters in the left-and right to use the setting symbol CL of, CM, and CR.

  Among these counters, the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, and CS2 are loop counters that each add 1 to the previous value and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 311 and, as a result, the numerical values change randomly. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter area set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313. The RAM 313 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game to the operation ports 84a and 84b is provided. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in time series in accordance with the winning prize history of the ball.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 676, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball is won in the operation ports 84a and 84b.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 49, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 49) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2 determines whether the probability change state or the normal state is set after the jackpot is finished. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 84a, 84b.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the reach random number counter C3 causes the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach to stop by shifting the last stop symbol by one before and after the reach symbol, and the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach also reaches the reach symbol. “Reach other than front / rear out” and stop “complete out” that does not occur reach. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 84a, 84b.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The second variation type counter CS2 includes, for example, Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. The first variation type counter CS1 determines the display mode of the symbol display device 91, such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., the reach type of the first symbol and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 The switching display time is determined as a period for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 93. The switching display time corresponds to the symbol variation time of the symbol display device 91. Therefore, by the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment) stops after the occurrence of reach in the symbol display device 91, etc. A detailed design variation mode is also determined. That is, regarding the symbol display device 91, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the area values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired at the time of starting the switching of the color displayed on the first specific lamp section 93 and determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the first symbol by the symbol display device 91.

  The left, middle and right off symbol counters CL, CM, CR determine the stop symbol of the left row 1 symbol, the middle row 1 symbol, and the right row 1 symbol when the big hit lottery is missed. In each column, any one of the 20 first symbols is displayed in combination with the main symbol and the sub symbol, so 20 counter values (0 to 19) are prepared for each. The left, upper, middle and lower symbols are determined by the out symbol counter CL, the upper, middle and lower symbols are determined by the out symbol counter CM, and the right symbol column is determined by the out symbol counter CR. The top, middle and bottom symbols are determined.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter CL, CM, CR is updated at random by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 311. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the maximum value, 20 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated in the normal process so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach other than the front / rear away symbol area of the RAM 313, the reach other than front / rear out. It is stored in either the symbol area or the completely off symbol area. Then, when determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the first symbol, one of the area values of the front / rear out of reach symbol area, the reach symbol area other than front / rear out of reach, and the completely out of symbol area is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3. The

  Although illustration is omitted, a second specific lamp random number counter is used for lottery of the second specific lamp unit 94. The second symbol random number counter is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second specific ramp random number counter is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 85.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the CPU 311 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the NMI interrupt process and the timer interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 18 shows an NMI interrupt process, which is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 303 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 311 and the CPU 311 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing. . In the NMI interrupt processing, the power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 313 in step S101, and this processing is terminated. Thereafter, when it is confirmed that the power failure flag is stored in the normal processing described later, the power failure processing is executed.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S201, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, a signal reading process from a sensor relating to winning of a game ball, such as the winning hole sensors 152a to 152c, the count sensor 153, the operating hole sensors 154a and 154b, and the gate sensor 155, is executed. Details of the signal reading process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 313. In subsequent step S203, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values reach the maximum values (in the present embodiment, 676, 49, and 238, respectively). Each time it is cleared to 0. And the update value of each counter C1-C3 is stored in the applicable area of RAM313. Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in step S204.

  In the start winning process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the operating port flag is stored in the operating port flag storage area of the RAM 313, whereby the game ball is moved to the operating port 84a. , 84b is determined whether or not (starting winning) is won. If it is determined that the game ball has won the operating holes 84a, 84b, in the subsequent step S302, the number N of the operation reserved balls of the first specific lamp unit 93 and the symbol display device 91 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not there is. The process proceeds to step S303 on condition that there is a winning at the operation ports 84a and 84b and the number N of activated balls is less than 4, and 1 is added to the number N of activated balls. Note that the operation port flag is deleted after the process of step S303. In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S203 are stored in the first area of the free storage area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Then, after the start winning process, the CPU 311 once ends the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the main process that is started upon reset at power-on will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S401, a startup process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, in order to wait for the slave control board (such as the payout control board 322) to be operable, it waits for about 500 msec, for example.

  In the subsequent step S402, it is determined whether or not 1 sec, which is a permission prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process in step S401. If 1 sec has not elapsed, the process of step S402 is executed again. This time measurement is performed by counting the number of times of processing in step S402. For example, if the time required to execute the process of step S402 again after making a negative determination in step S402 is 0.1 msec, the count value is 10,000 times, so that after the startup process of step S401 It is determined that 1 sec has passed. Note that the specific configuration of time measurement is arbitrary, and for example, time measurement may be performed using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S403.

  In step S403, access to the RAM 313 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S404, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 247 provided in the power supply and launch control device 243 is turned on. In subsequent step S405, whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313 is determined. Determine. In step S406, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. The RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 313, for example. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 are correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 247. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 247 is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S408 to S409. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to steps S408 to S409.

  In step S408, the used area of the RAM 313 is cleared to 0, and in step S409, initialization processing of the RAM 313 is executed. Thereafter, in step S410, an initial command is output to the payout control board 322, and interrupt permission is set in step S411, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later. The CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 recognizes that communication with the main control board 301 is normally performed by inputting an initial command from the main control board 301.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 247 is not pressed, the power failure flag is stored in step S412 on the condition that the power failure flag is stored and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Clear the power failure flag stored in the area. After that, an initial command is output in step S410 and interrupt permission is set in step S411, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later. Thereby, it returns to the state before power-off.

  Next, normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S501 to S509 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S511 and S512 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S501, the both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. Specifically, both the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the update values of both variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 313. In the following step S502, the outlier counters CL, CM, CR of the left symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the right symbol row are updated.

  In the update process of the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of any of the left, middle, and right symbol sequences, and the out symbol counter CL, CM, CR of the symbol sequence that has reached the update time is determined. Update. Each out symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated one by one in one normal process without duplication, and every time the normal processing is executed three times, one set of out symbol counters CL, CM, CR is obtained. It has been updated. And, when the combination of the updated out symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of outreach symbols that are front / rear out of reach, a combination of reach symbols other than front / rear out of reach, a combination of completely out symbols that do not become reach In some cases, the combination is stored in the corresponding area. If the combination of the updated off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of jackpot symbols, the update process is terminated as it is.

  After the update process of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, a first specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 93 is executed in step S503. In the first specific lamp unit control process, jackpot determination, on / off control of a light source switch of an LED lamp disposed in the first specific lamp unit 93, and the like are performed. In the first specific lamp unit control process, the symbol display device 91 also sets the first symbol variation display.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and further determines the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (determines whether or not it is a so-called probabilistic jackpot). . At this time, the type of jackpot symbol in the first symbol and the stop line for the combination of jackpot symbols are also determined and set as a stop symbol command. If it is determined that no jackpot will occur, the combination of outlier symbols in the first symbol is determined based on the value of the reach random number counter C3. In such a case, the combination of symbols updated in the outlier symbol counter updating process and stored in the area is set as a stop symbol command. Furthermore, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the switching display time of the color displayed on the first specific lamp section 93 and the variation display time of the first symbol are determined. Further, the reach type in the first symbol and its rough symbol variation mode are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, and set as a variation mode command. Each time the on / off control of the first specific lamp unit 93 is started in the first specific lamp unit control process, the number of the operation reserved balls N is decremented by 1 and when the number of the operation reserved balls N is 0, the on / off control is performed. Does not start.

  After the first specific lamp unit control process, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S504. In the big prize opening / closing process, the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 83 is opened or closed in the case of the big hit state. That is, it is determined whether the big winning opening is opened for each round of the big hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening has passed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big winning opening. The determination as to whether or not the prescribed number has been won is made by checking the special prize counter. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening is closed.

  Thereafter, in step S505, a second specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the second specific lamp unit 94 is executed. In the second specific lamp unit control process, the switching of the display color in the second specific lamp unit 94 is started on condition that the number of gate holding balls is 1 or more. At this time, the display color switching time is also set. In addition, a color for stop display is set based on the value of the second specific lamp random number counter already acquired. When a predetermined color is set as the stop-displayed color, the electric accessory 89 associated with the lower operation port 84b is opened for a predetermined time after the stop display of the color.

  After step S505, a game ball launch control process is executed in step S506. In the game ball launch control process, the game ball launch mechanism 110 is once per predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the launch control unit 321b of the power source and launch control board 321. The solenoid 111 is excited. Thereby, the game ball on the launch rail 112 is launched toward the game area.

  After step S506, an input state monitoring process is executed in step S507, and a payout output process is executed in step S508. These processes will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S509, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is stored in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 313. When the power failure flag is not stored, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S510, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S511, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 313. In step S512, both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. Specifically, both the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the update values of both variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 313.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S509 that the power failure flag is stored, the power interruption has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S513 is executed. That is, in step S513, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S514. After the access to the RAM 313 is prohibited in step S515, the power supply is completely shut down and processed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Electric configuration for paying out game balls>
Next, the electrical configuration and processing configuration related to game ball payout will be described in detail. First, the electrical configuration will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. In FIG. 23, a power supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and a signal line is indicated by a solid line arrow.

  The main control board 301 and the payout control board 322 are electrically connected via an electrical wiring (signal line) such as a harness, and a command as command information is output from the main control board 301 to the payout control board 322. At the same time, various electrical signals are output from the payout control board 322 to the main control board 301.

  The CPU 311 of the main control board 301 includes a first input port (first input part) 351 and a second input port (second input part) 352, and the electric power from the payout control board 322 is input to these input ports 351 and 352. In addition to inputting signals, electric signals from various sensors are input. Here, the configuration of the first input port 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first input port 351.

  The first input port 351 includes a signal input buffer B for storing each input information. The signal input buffer B is composed of 1 byte, and includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. These 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7 have signal paths formed between different signal output sources, and information is stored based on signals input from these signal output sources.

  Specifically, a signal path is formed between the 0th bit D0 and the lower working port sensor 154b, a signal path is formed between the first bit D1 and the upper working port sensor 154a, and the second A signal path is formed between the bit D2 and the count sensor 153, a signal path is formed between the third bit D3 and the gate sensor 155, and a fourth bit D4 is connected to the first prize opening sensor 152a. A signal path is formed between the fifth bit D5 and the second winning port sensor 152b, and a sixth bit D6 is a signal between the third winning port sensor 152c. A path is formed, and a signal path is formed between the seventh bit D7 and the payout control board 322. In addition, a prize ball permission signal output from the payout control board 322 is input to the seventh bit D7. Details of the winning ball permission signal will be described later.

  As described above, the lower operation port sensor 154b, the upper operation port sensor 154a, the count sensor 153, the gate sensor 155, and the winning port sensors 152a to 152c flow down the game area, and the lower operation port 84b, the upper operation port 84a, and the variable. This is for detecting a game ball that has passed through the winning device 83, the general winning port 82, and the through gate 85. While the game ball is not detected, an HI level signal is output and the game ball is detected. Is configured to output a LOW level signal. However, the main control board 301 has an inverting circuit. Therefore, information (data 0) of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 to the 6th bit D6 while the HI level signal is output from the corresponding sensors 154b, 154a, 153, 155, and 152a to 152c. While the LOW level signal is output, information “1” (data 1) is stored.

  The sensor 152 to 155 may output a LOW level signal while the game ball is not detected, and may output a HI level signal while the game ball is detected. In this case, the inverting circuit is not provided, and further, “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 to the 6th bit D6 while the LOW level signal is output from the corresponding sensors 152 to 155, and the HI is stored. “1” is stored while the level signal is output.

  On the other hand, the prize ball permission signal is not the target of the inverting circuit, and “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 while the LOW level signal is output from the payout control board 322 for the prize ball permission signal. While the HI level signal (this corresponds to a prize ball permission signal in the pachinko machine 10) is output, “1” is stored in the seventh bit D7.

  In the CPU 311 of the main control board 301, the presence / absence of a prize based on the information stored in the respective bits D0 to D7 of the first input port 351 (whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing portion provided in the gaming area and subject to passage detection) Or the like). The second input port 352 is composed of 1 byte as in the case of the first input port 351, although not shown in the figure. Each bit includes a front door frame opening switch 78 and a body frame opening switch 217. Among these signals, signals other than the above-mentioned prize ball permission signal among signals outputted from the payout control board 322 are inputted. That is, some signal used for executing processing in the CPU 311 is input to each bit of the second input port 352.

  The electrical signals output from the front door frame opening switch 78 and the main body frame opening switch 217 are input to the main control board 301 after being relayed to the power supply and launch control board 321 and the payout control board 322. In this case, the dispensing control board 322 only relays electrical signals from the front door frame opening switch 78 and the main body frame opening switch 217 and does not input it to the CPU 331 of the dispensing control board 322. The same applies to the power supply and launch control board 321. Further, instead of the first input port 351 and the second input port 352, a first input / output port and a second input / output port may be provided, and the input / output may be appropriately changed in the CPU.

  The first input port 351 and the second input port 352 may be installed on the main control board 301 separately from the CPU 311 chip as a driver IC instead of the CPU 311. In this case, the CPU 311 may have a single input port or input / output port.

  A configuration of the RAM 313 of the main control board 301 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 25 is referred to as appropriate. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the RAM 313.

  The RAM 313 of the main control board 301 is provided with a prize ball counter area 361 as means for individually storing information. As shown in FIG. 25, the prize ball counter area 361 includes 15 prize ball counter areas 361a, 10 prize ball counter areas 361b, 4 prize ball counter areas 361c, and 3 prize balls. Counter area 361d.

  Here, as already described in the pachinko machine 10, the prize winning ball entrance part (or the prize payout passing part) includes a general winning port 82, a variable winning device 83, an upper operating port 84a and a lower operating port 84b. Are provided, and the number of winning balls (the number of game balls to be paid out) differs depending on each winning ball entrance. Specifically, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 82 is 10, and the number of winning balls when entering the variable winning device 83 is 15, and entering the upper operation opening 84a. In this case, the number of prize balls is three, and the number of prize balls when entering the lower working port 84b is four.

  In this configuration, the 15 winning ball counter area 361a stores how many times 15 winning balls will be made for entering the variable winning device 83 (15 winning balls for entering the variable winning device 83). The ten-ply-ball counter area 361b stores how many times the ten-ply ball is entered for the general winning slot 82 (general). (It stores the number of unexecuted 10 award balls for entering the winning opening 82), and the 4-ball counter area 361c counts the number of remaining 4 award balls for entering the lower operating opening 84b. (It stores the number of unimplemented four prize balls for entering the lower operation port 84b). The three-ball counter area 361d enters the upper operation port 84a. What are three more prize balls for the ball? It is for storing whether to perform (and stores a non-execution count of three award balls for entering the sphere onto working port 84a). Each of the prize ball counter areas 361a to 361d is composed of 1 byte, and can memorize a maximum of 255 prize balls.

  The prize ball number pattern is an example, and each number is arbitrary. Also, the pattern of the number of winning balls is not limited to the above four types, and may be two types, three types, or five types or more. Each of the prize ball counter areas 361a to 361d is not limited to 1 byte, and may be 2 bytes or 3 bytes or more. Furthermore, the number of unexecuted prize balls that can be stored in each of the prize ball counter areas 361a to 361d is not necessarily up to 255 times, and if multiple times can be stored, it is less than 255 times or There may be many.

  The CPU 311 of the main control board 301 determines the presence / absence of winning based on the information (principal information) stored in each of the winning ball counter areas 361a to 361d. A prize ball command corresponding to the type of winning is output to the payout control board 322.

  Here, the information format of the prize ball command will be described with reference to FIG.

  The prize ball command is stored in advance in the command storage area 312a of the ROM 312 of the main control board 301. As prize ball commands, 15 prize ball commands, 10 prize ball commands, 4 prize ball commands, and 3 prize ball commands are set. When a prize ball command is output based on the prize ball information stored in the 15 prize ball counter area 361a, 15 prize ball commands are outputted and stored in the 10 prize ball counter area 361b. When a prize ball command is output based on the prize ball information, ten prize ball commands are output, and a prize ball command is output based on the prize ball information stored in the four prize ball counter area 361c. If four prize ball commands are output, three prize ball commands are output when prize ball commands are output based on the prize ball information stored in the three prize ball counter area 361d. Is done.

  Each prize ball command is composed of 2 bytes. That is, each prize ball command includes high-order information and low-order information, and each piece of information is composed of 1 byte. That is, the upper information and the lower information are composed of the same number of bits. Among the upper information and the lower information, information for specifying that the command is a prize ball command in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is set in the upper information, and the lower information includes the information on the payout control board 322. In the CPU 331, information on the number of winning balls of the winning ball command is set.

  The specific information form of each prize ball command is as shown in FIG. In this case, one arbitrary prize ball command is set so that the form of information consisting of 1 byte when the addition of the upper information and the lower information is calculated is “FF” in hexadecimal. For example, for the 15 prize ball commands, the upper information is “11110000” and the lower information is “00001111”. When these additions are calculated, “11111111” is obtained. Further, in detail for the three prize ball commands, the upper information is “11111100” and the lower information is “00000011”. When these additions are calculated, “11111111” is obtained. Since the prize ball command is in the information form as described above, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 can determine whether or not the prize ball command input from the main control board 301 is normal. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the RAM 313 of the main control board 301 is provided with an area for previous time 362 and an area for previous time 363. These areas 362 and 363 are used when the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 determines the presence / absence of winning based on the information stored in the first input port 351.

  In addition, the RAM 313 of the main control board 301 is provided with a front door frame counter area 364, a prize ball permission counter area 365, and various flag storage areas 366. The front door frame counter area 364 is used when the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 determines whether the front door frame 14 is opened or closed. The prize ball permission counter area 365 is used when the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 executes processing related to the prize ball permission signal. Various flag storage areas 366 are used when the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 executes various control processes.

  The payout control board 322 includes a motor driver 334 that operates a payout motor 257 of the payout device 224, and the motor driver 334 operates the payout motor 257 based on a drive signal output from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. . A drive signal output from the CPU 331 to the motor driver 334 is given as excitation data. This excitation data is stored in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322, and the excitation phase for the payout motor 257 constituted by the stepping motor is determined by this excitation data, and the excitation signal is energized to the excitation phase. The excitation phase pattern to be energized is switched by a one-pulse drive signal output from the CPU 331 to the motor driver 334, and the excitation phase pattern is switched by one step, whereby the output shaft 257a of the payout motor 257, that is, The rotating body 256 fixed to the output shaft 257a advances one step (the rotational position changes). Then, when a drive signal of 60 pulses is given from the CPU 331, the rotating body 256 makes one rotation.

  The CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is electrically connected to the payout ball detection sensor 258 of the payout device 224, and receives an electric signal indicating whether or not a game ball is detected from the payout ball detection sensor 258. The payout ball detection sensor 258 outputs a LOW level signal while the game ball is not passing through the through hole of the detection unit 258a and maintains the state, and outputs a HI level signal while the game ball is passing. In addition, it is configured to maintain that state. While the LOW level signal is output from the payout ball detection sensor 258, “0” information (data 0) is stored in the input port (or input / output port) of the CPU 331 as the payout non-detection information, and the HI level signal Is output to the input port (or input / output port) of the CPU 331 as “1” information (data 1) as payout detection information.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output of the LOW level signal and the output of the HI level signal may be reversed. In this case, the payout control board 322 may be provided with an inverting circuit, and by providing the inverting circuit, the information storage mode for the signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 at the input port of the CPU 331 is the same as described above. Become.

  Also, the payout control board 322 is electrically connected to the ball lending device Y via the ball lending connection terminal plate 249, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 receives an electric signal from the ball lending device Y. The ball rental control is executed by outputting. In addition, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 inputs electrical signals from the full tank detection sensor 59 and the ball no-detection sensor 223a, specifies whether or not the lower plate 34 is full, and the tank 221 has no ball. Specify whether or not it is in a state. The electric signal output from the full tank detection sensor 59 out of the full tank detection sensor 59 and the non-ball detection sensor 223a is relayed to the power supply and launch control board 321 and then input to the payout control board 322. Note that the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 outputs to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 the result of specifying whether or not the lower plate 34 is full. Thus, the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 can grasp whether or not the lower plate 34 is full. Further, the payout control board 322 is electrically connected to the payout display lamp unit 27 provided on the front door frame 14, and when an abnormality notification is executed in the payout monitoring process described later, the payout display lamp The unit 27 is blinked and displayed in a predetermined manner.

  A configuration of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 26 is appropriately referred to. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the RAM 333.

  A full counter area 371 is provided in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The full tank counter area 371 is used in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to specify whether or not the lower plate 34 is full. The RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is provided with a ballless counter area 372. The ball-less counter area 372 is used in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to specify whether or not the tank 221 is in a ball-free state. A command storage area 373 is provided in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The command storage area 373 is used for temporarily storing a prize ball command input from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301.

  The RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is provided with a prize ball number storage area 374. As shown in FIG. 26A, the winning ball number storage area 374 is composed of 1 byte in which a plurality of bits (8 bits) are arranged in a line, and each bit has “0” (data 0). Or no information) or “1” (data 1 or presence information). The prize ball number storage area 374 has a function for storing information on the number of prize balls specified by analyzing the prize ball command in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. In this case, in the information on the number of prize balls (award ball number information or prize payout number information), the setting pattern of the data 1 of each bit and the number of game media correspond one-to-one within a predetermined range of game media. Information. Specifically, a predetermined order from the lower bit (the rightmost bit in FIG. 26A) to the higher bit (the leftmost bit in FIG. 26A) (the right bit to the left bit). 2) so that each bit is set to “1” (data 1 or presence information) and the higher-order bit is set to “1”, the larger the corresponding number of winning balls is. It is information represented by.

  Here, when the information on the number of prize balls is specified from the prize ball command, the prize ball table storage area 332a provided in the ROM 332 of the payout control board 322 is referred to. In the prize ball table storage area 332a, as shown in FIG. 26D, a correspondence relationship between the prize ball command input from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 and the number of prize balls is stored.

  Further, the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is provided with a number-of-balls storage area 375. The number-of-balls storage area 375 is composed of 1 byte as shown in FIG. 26B, and stores information on the number of balls entered from the ball lending device Y in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. It has the function of In addition, a payout number counter area 376 is provided in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The payout number counter area 376 is composed of 1 byte as shown in FIG. 26 (c), and has a function as an execution area for executing the payout of game balls in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322.

  The award ball number storage area 374, the rented ball number storage area 375, and the payout number counter area 376 are not limited to 1 byte, and may be 2 bytes or 3 bytes or more. Further, these areas 374 to 376 need not have the same number of bytes.

  Various flag storage areas 377 are provided in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The various flag storage areas 377 are used when the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 executes various control processes.

  Further, a drive counter area 378 is provided in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The drive counter area 378 is composed of 1 byte, and is used to drive and control the payout motor 257 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 and used to identify an abnormality in the payout device 224. In addition, a detection abnormality counter area 379 is provided in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The detection abnormality counter area 379 is composed of 1 byte, and is used to identify an abnormality in the dispensing device 224 in the CPU 331 of the dispensing control board 322. The RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is provided with a payout specifying counter area 380. The payout specifying counter area 380 is composed of 1 byte, and indicates whether or not the game ball has been paid out through the payout operation of the payout motor 257 (that is, the payout operation of the rotating body 256) in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. Used to specify.

  The drive counter area 378, the detection abnormality counter area 379, and the payout specifying counter area 380 are not limited to 1 byte, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 performs processing using each counter area 378 to 380 in a favorable manner. If executed, it may be less than 1 byte, ie less than 8 bits.

  In addition to the areas 371 to 380, the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is provided with a ring buffer for temporarily storing the command when the command is inputted from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301. It has been. The ring buffer has a plurality of storage areas, and a read pointer (write pointer) and a read pointer are set therein. A command is sequentially read into each storage area based on the read pointer, and a command stored in each storage area is sequentially read based on the read pointer.

  The power from the power-on power supply unit 321 a of the power supply and launch control board 321 is supplied to the VCC terminal of the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 and the VCC terminal of the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. In a situation where power is supplied from the external power supply by the power supplied to the VCC terminal, various control processes are executed by the CPUs 311 and 331, and information is stored and held by the RAMs 313 and 333. Is called.

  In addition, power from the power supply and power supply unit 321 c for power interruption of the launch control board 321 is supplied to the VBB terminal of the CPU 311 of the main control board 301. In other words, the power from the power supply unit 321 c for power interruption is supplied to the RAM 313 of the main control board 301 but is not supplied to the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. Information is stored and held in the RAM 313 of the main control board 301 in a situation where the power supplied from the external power supply is cut off by the power supplied to the VBB terminal. As already described, the power supplied to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 from the power-on power supply unit 321a and the power-off power supply unit 321c is relayed by the power failure monitoring circuit 303. Further, the VBB terminal of the payout control board 322 is grounded or not connected to any electrical wiring.

  Instead of the configuration in which the VCC terminal and the VBB terminal are electrically connected in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322, for example, in the payout side CPU 331, the VCC terminal and the VBB terminal are not electrically connected. Also good. In this case, since the power is supplied to the payout side RAM 333 only from the VBB terminal, in order to supply power to the payout side RAM 333 while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, The unit 321a and the VBB terminal of the payout side CPU 331 may be electrically connected to supply the power from the power-on power supply unit 321a to the VBB terminal of the payout side CPU 331. The same applies to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301.

<Processing configuration related to game ball payout and processing configuration in CPU 311 of main control board 301>
Next, the processing configuration in the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 relating to the payout of game balls will be described. In the following description, the value of the counter area refers to a value that virtually represents the value of the counter area configured in units of bytes in decimal.

<Reading process>
First, the reading process executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27 and the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the reading process, first, in step S601, a process of acquiring information on the first input port 351 as current input information is executed. The process will be described in detail. The CPU 311 is provided with a current register (calculation current storage means) 381 (see FIG. 28). The current register 381 has the same number of bits as the first input port 351. That is, the current register 381 is composed of 1 byte. In the process of step S601, the “0” or “1” information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 of the first input port 351 is used as the 0th to 7th bits D0 of the current register 381. Store in each bit corresponding to .about.D7.

  For example, when the lower working port sensor 154b, the count sensor 153, the second winning port sensor 152b, and the prize ball permission signal are ON, and the others are OFF, they are stored in the current register 381. The information form of the current input information is “10100101” as shown in FIG.

  In the subsequent step S602, a mask process is performed on the current input information. In this mask processing, a logical product of the input information mask stored in advance in the ROM 312 of the main control board 301 and the current input information stored in the current register 381 is calculated (AND processing). Information is updated in the current register 381. Specifically, the input information mask is “01111111”. That is, the input information mask is a mask for clearing “0” of bits other than the bit for storing information indicating whether or not there is a winning in the current input information. Therefore, after the process of step S602 is executed, the bit (seventh bit) corresponding to the information of the winning ball permission signal that is irrelevant to the information on the presence / absence of winning is cleared to “0”.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 28, the information format of the current input information after the process of step S602 is “00100101” as shown in FIG.

  In the subsequent step S603, information stored in the previous area 362 of the RAM 313 is acquired as previous input information, and information stored in the previous area 363 of the RAM 313 is acquired as previous input information. .

  Here, the previous input information refers to information stored in the first input port 351 in the previous reading process, and the previous input information is stored in the first input port 351 in the previous read process. It means the information that was done. However, since the process of step S602 is executed as described above, information that is irrelevant to the information on the presence / absence of winning is cleared to “0”.

  The process of step S603 will be described in detail. In addition to the current register, the CPU 311 is provided with a previous register (previous storage unit for calculation) 382 and a previous register (previous storage unit for calculation) 383. The previous register 382 has the same number of bits as the current register 381 and the previous area 362 of the RAM 313. That is, the previous register 382 is composed of 1 byte. Further, the last-return register 383 is configured with the same number of bits as the current-rear register 381, the previous-time register 382, and the last-return area 363 of the RAM 313. In other words, the register for last use 383 is composed of 1 byte. In the process of step S <b> 603, the information “0” or “1” stored in each bit of the previous area 362 is stored in each corresponding bit in the previous register 382. In addition, the information “0” or “1” stored in each bit of the previous cycle area 363 is stored in each corresponding bit in the previous cycle register 383.

  For example, in the previous reading process, when the lower working port sensor 154b, the count sensor 153, the second winning port sensor 152b, and the third winning port sensor 152c are ON, and the other are OFF, The information form of the previous input information stored in the previous register 382 is “01100101” as shown in FIG. Also, when the second prize opening sensor 152b is turned on and the others are turned off in the reading process of the last time, the information form of the previous time input information stored in the previous time register 383 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28 (d), “00100000” is obtained.

  In a succeeding step S604, a next writing process is executed. In the next writing process, a process of updating the previous area 362 and the previous-time area 363 of the RAM 313 is executed for the next reading process. That is, the information in the previous area 362 is updated to the information stored in the current register 381, and the information in the previous use area 363 is updated to the information stored in the previous register 382.

  In the subsequent step S605, the inversion processing of the input information is executed twice before. Specifically, the value of each bit of the register 383 for the last time is inverted. For example, when the input information is “00100000” as shown in FIG. 28D, the inverted information is “11011111” as shown in FIG.

  In the subsequent step S606, an AND process is performed on the information in the previous register 383 reversed in step S605 and the previous input information stored in the previous register 382. That is, the logical product of the information in the previous register 383 inverted in step S605 and the previous input information stored in the previous register 382 is calculated. Then, the information on the calculation result is updated as information on the previous register 382.

  For example, if the inverted information is “11011111” as shown in FIG. 28E and the previous input information is “01100101” as shown in FIG. 28C, an AND process is performed in step S606. The resulting information is “01000101” as shown in FIG.

  Note that the calculation result information may be updated as information in the register 383 for the last time. However, in this case, in the process of step S607, it is necessary to use information stored in the register 383 for the last time.

  In the subsequent step S607, an AND process is performed on the information obtained as a result of the AND process in step S606 and the current input information after the mask process stored in the current register 381. That is, the logical product of the information in the previous register 382 obtained in step S606 and the information in the current register 381 obtained in step S602 is calculated. Then, the result of the calculation is updated as information in the current register 381.

  For example, the information in the previous register 382 obtained in step S606 is “01000101” as shown in FIG. 28 (f), and the information in the current register 381 obtained in step S602 is shown in FIG. 28 (b). Thus, in the case of “00100101”, the information on the result of AND processing in step S607 is “00000101” as shown in FIG.

  In a succeeding step S608, an information determination process is executed. Here, the information determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the information determination process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the 0th bit W0 of the current register 381, that is, whether or not “1” is stored in the 0th bit W0. If there is no winning information in the 0th bit W0 (when “0” is stored), the process proceeds to step S703 as it is. If there is winning information in the 0th bit W0 (when “1” is stored), after executing the first storage process in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703. In the first storing process, 1 is added to the value of the four prize ball counter areas 361c in the prize ball counter area 361 of the RAM 313. This is because winning information in the 0th bit W0 of the current register 381 at the stage of the information determination process means that winning has occurred in the lower operating port 84b.

  Incidentally, in the first storing process, the operating port flag (lottery trigger information) is stored in the operating port flag storage area (lottery trigger information storage means) of the RAM 313. The operating port flag is used to determine whether or not a winning for the lower operating port 84b has occurred in the above-described start winning process (FIG. 20). In addition, since the upper operating port 84a and the lower operating port 84b are provided as the operating ports, the operating port flag storage areas are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the operating ports 84a and 84b. That is, the first lottery opportunity information storage means and the second lottery opportunity information storage means are provided as the lottery opportunity information storage means.

  In the subsequent step S703, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the first bit W1 of the current register 381, that is, whether or not “1” is stored in the first bit W1. If there is no winning information in the first bit W1 (when “0” is stored), the process proceeds to step S705 as it is. If there is winning information in the first bit W1 (when “1” is stored), the second storage process is executed in step S704, and then the process proceeds to step S705. In the second storing process, 1 is added to the value of the three prize ball counter areas 361d in the prize ball counter area 361 of the RAM 313. This is because the fact that there is winning information in the first bit W1 of the current register 381 at the stage of the information determination processing means that winning has occurred in the upper operating port 84a. Incidentally, in the second storage process, the operation port flag is stored in the operation port flag storage area corresponding to the upper operation port 84a in the RAM 313.

  In the subsequent step S705, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the second bit W2 of the current register 381, that is, whether or not “1” is stored in the second bit W2. If there is no winning information in the second bit W2 (when “0” is stored), the process proceeds to step S707 as it is. If there is winning information in the second bit W2 (when “1” is stored), the third storage process is executed in step S706, and then the process proceeds to step S707. In the third storing process, 1 is added to the value of the 15 prize ball counter areas 361a in the prize ball counter area 361 of the RAM 313. This is because the fact that there is winning information in the second bit W2 of the current register 381 at the stage of the information determination processing means that winning has been won in the variable winning device 83. Incidentally, in the third storing process, the big prize mouth flag (special prize information) is stored in the big prize mouth flag storage area (special prize information storage means) provided in the RAM 313. The big prize opening flag is used to determine whether or not a prize for the variable prize winning device 83 has occurred in the above-described big prize opening opening / closing process (step S504 in FIG. 22).

  In the subsequent step S707, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the third bit W3 of the current register 381, that is, whether or not “1” is stored in the third bit W3. If there is no winning information in the third bit W3 (when “0” is stored), the process proceeds to step S709. If there is winning information in the third bit W3 (when “1” is stored), the fourth storage process is executed in step S708, and then the process proceeds to step S709. In the fourth storage process, a through flag is stored in a through flag storage area provided in the RAM 313. This through flag is used to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the through gate 85 in the above-described second specific lamp unit control process (step S505 in FIG. 22). This is because winning information in the third bit W3 of the current register 381 at the stage of the information determination process means that the game ball has passed through the through gate 85.

  In the subsequent step S709, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the fourth bit W4 of the current register 381, that is, whether or not “1” is stored in the fourth bit W4. If there is no winning information in the fourth bit W4 (when “0” is stored), the process proceeds to step S711. If there is winning information in the fourth bit W4 (when “1” is stored), the fifth storage process is executed in step S710, and then the process proceeds to step S711. In the fifth storing process, 1 is added to the value of the ten-award ball counter area 361b in the award-ball counter area 361 of the RAM 313. The fact that winning information is present in the fourth bit W4 of the current register 381 at the stage of the information determination process means that winning of one general winning port 82 out of the plurality of general winning ports 82 has occurred. It is.

  In a succeeding step S711, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the fifth bit W5 of the current register 381, that is, whether or not “1” is stored in the fifth bit W5. If there is no winning information in the fifth bit W5 (when “0” is stored), the process proceeds to step S713. If there is winning information in the fifth bit W5 (when “1” is stored), the fifth storage process is executed in step S712, and then the process proceeds to step S713. The fifth storage process has already been described. The fact that winning information is present in the fifth bit W5 of the current register 381 at the stage of the information determination process means that winning of one general winning port 82 out of the plurality of general winning ports 82 has occurred. It is.

  In a succeeding step S713, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the sixth bit W6 of the current register 381, that is, whether or not “1” is stored in the sixth bit W6. If there is no winning information in the sixth bit W6 (when “0” is stored), the information determination process is terminated as it is. If there is winning information in the sixth bit W6 (when “1” is stored), the information determination process is terminated after the fifth storage process is executed in step S714. The fifth storage process has already been described. The fact that there is winning information in the sixth bit W6 of the current register 381 at the stage of the information determination processing means that winning in one general winning port 82 out of the plurality of general winning ports 82 has occurred. It is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the passing portion (the winning ball entering portion provided in the game area) such as the general winning port 82, the variable winning device 83, the upper operating port 84a, the lower operating port 84b, and the through gate 85 is provided. In the reading process executed at a predetermined cycle (specifically, 2 msec), the first input port 351 is confirmed. Is done.

  In this case, the condition for determining that a winning has occurred (hereinafter, also referred to as a winning determination condition) is that a game ball is not detected from the ball detection sensor within the range of the reference consecutive number set as a plurality of times. After it is confirmed that the non-detection information is output, the detection information indicating that the game ball is detected from the ball detection sensor is continuously output for the number of winning reference times set as a plurality of times. It has been confirmed that. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10, the reference continuous number of times is set to three, and the non-detection information is stored in the 0th bit of the register 383 for the last time before the various arithmetic processes. "0" is stored, detection information "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the previous register 382, and detection information "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the current register 381. When stored, the first bit W0 of the current register 381 after various arithmetic processes stores “1” as winning information.

  By setting the winning determination condition, the CPU 311 can accurately grasp the occurrence of winning. In other words, while the various sensors 152 to 155 that detect the game ball have a predetermined detection range, the processing execution timing of the CPU 311 is from when the sensor 152 to 155 starts detecting the game ball until it ends. It is set to occur many times during In this case, there is a concern that, even though it has already been determined that there is a prize for the occurrence of a single prize, the CPU 311 confirms the detection information again to determine that there is a prize again. . On the other hand, since it is necessary to check the detection information after the non-detection information within the range of the number of determination criteria in the above-described winning determination condition, the determination that there is a winning is performed once for the occurrence of one winning. After that, the winning is not judged again.

  Moreover, even if the detection information is stored in the bits D0 to D7 of the first input port 351 due to noise or the like due to the fact that the detection information is confirmed continuously for the winning reference number as a winning determination condition. In contrast, the CPU 311 can be prevented from determining that there is a prize.

  Further, the first input port 351 and the registers 381 to 383 are configured in the same byte unit, and all the information from the ball detection sensors 152 to 155 for winning determination is input to them. When determining whether or not a prize has occurred, various arithmetic processes are performed on the input information in bytes of the registers 381 to 383. Thereby, it is possible to collectively generate winning information for determining whether or not winning has occurred for each of the ball detection sensors 152 to 155. In the pachinko machine 10, a general winning port 82, a variable winning device 83, an upper operating port 84a, a lower operating port 84b, and a through gate 85 are installed in the same game area, and a large number of game balls are placed in the game area. Since they will flow down at the same time, winnings in each passing part may occur simultaneously. In this case, if the processing for generating the winning information must be performed individually for each of the ball detection sensors 152 to 155, the processing load becomes considerably excessive. Also, for example, assuming a configuration in which a winning determination counter is provided and winning information is generated by counting each time a reading process is executed, the counter is provided for each of the ball detection sensors 152 to 155 individually. Every time the reading process is executed, it is necessary to execute all the counter addition and reset processes. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, winning information can be generated collectively, so that the above-described excellent effect can be obtained while suppressing an increase in processing load and storage capacity of the CPU 311.

<Input status monitoring process>
Next, the input state monitoring process executed in step S507 of the normal process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the input state monitoring process, first, input information is acquired from the second input port 352 in step S801. Specifically, the input information of the second input port 352 is stored in a 1-byte general-purpose register provided in the CPU 311.

  In the subsequent step S802, a payout abnormality signal monitoring process for specifying whether or not an abnormality has occurred regarding the payout of game balls is executed. Specifically, in the payout abnormality signal monitoring process, when information indicating that an abnormality signal is input from the payout control board 322 is stored in the general-purpose register, the occurrence of a payout abnormality is identified in the CPU 311 of the main control board 301. To do. When the occurrence of a payout abnormality is specified, a payout abnormality command (payout abnormality information) is output to the audio lamp control board 324, and abnormality notification is executed. The form of this abnormality notification is arbitrary, for example, lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, output of notification sound from the speaker unit 26, notification display on the display screen of the symbol display device 91, and the like. In addition, an abnormality signal may be output to the game hall management computer (hall computer) through the external terminal board 213. In this case, the payout abnormality includes the absence of a ball in the tank 221.

  In the subsequent step S803, a full tank signal monitoring process for specifying whether or not the lower plate 34 is in a full state is executed. Specifically, in the full tank signal monitoring process, when information indicating that a full tank signal is input from the payout control board 322 is stored in the general-purpose register, the lower plate 34 is in a full state. The CPU 311 of the control board 301 is specified. When it is specified that the lower plate 34 is in a full state, a full state command (full state information) is output to the audio lamp control board 324 to execute a full state notification. This full tank notification mode is arbitrary, and for example, lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, output of a notification sound from the speaker unit 26, notification display on the display screen of the symbol display device 91, and the like are conceivable. Further, a full signal may be output to the game hall management computer (hall computer) through the external terminal board 213.

  In a succeeding step S804, a body frame open signal monitoring process for specifying whether or not the body frame 13 is in an open state is executed. Specifically, in the main body frame open signal monitoring process, when the information indicating that the main body frame open signal is input from the main body frame open switch 217 is stored in the general-purpose register, the main body frame 13 is in the open state. Is specified by the CPU 311 of the main control board 301. When it is specified that the main body frame 13 is in the open state, a main body frame open state command (main body open notification information) is output to the sound lamp control board 324 to execute the main body open notification. The form of the main body opening notification is arbitrary. For example, lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, output of a notification sound from the speaker unit 26, notification display on the display screen of the symbol display device 91, and the like can be considered. Further, a main body opening signal may be output to the management computer (hall computer) of the game hall through the external terminal board 213.

  Thereafter, the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is executed in step S805, and after the prize ball permission signal monitoring process is executed in step S806, the input state monitoring process is terminated.

<Front door frame opening signal monitoring processing>
Next, the front door frame opening signal monitoring process in step S805 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is (1) a process when the closed state is continued after the front door frame 14 is specified to be closed, and (2) the front door. Processing until the frame 14 is changed from the closed state to the open state until it is specified to be in the open state, (3) after the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state, The process when the open state is continued, and (4) the process when the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state and until the closed state is specified, are roughly classified. Therefore, the processing of these situations will be described individually.

  First, the processing when the front door frame 14 of the above (1) is specified to be closed and the closed state is continued will be described.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not front door frame opening information indicating that a front door frame opening signal indicating that the front door frame 14 is in an open state is input is stored in the general-purpose register. Since this time is the case where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, a negative determination is made in step S901, and the process proceeds to step S902.

  In step S <b> 902, the opening specific reference number is stored in the first front door frame counter area (opening specific trigger grasping means) in the front door frame counter area 364 of the RAM 313. Specifically, “3” is stored in the front door frame counter area 364. The first front door frame counter area is a counter used when the CPU 311 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the closed front door frame 14 is opened.

  In a succeeding step S903, it is determined whether or not the second front door frame counter area (the closing specific opportunity grasping means) in the front door frame counter area 364 of the RAM 313 is “0”. The second front door frame counter area is a counter used when the CPU 311 specifies that the front door frame 14 is closed when the front door frame 14 in the open state is closed. The second front door frame counter area is maintained in a state of “0” after specifying that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Therefore, after it is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the closed state continues, the second front door frame counter area is “0”, and in step S903. An affirmative determination is made, and the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated as it is.

  Next, a process until the front door frame 14 of the above (2) is changed from the closed state to the open state and is specified to be in the open state will be described.

  Since this time is the case where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, an affirmative determination is made in step S901 and the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, the closing specific reference value information is stored in the second front door frame counter area of the RAM 313. Specifically, “250” is stored in the second front door frame counter area.

  In a succeeding step S912, it is determined whether or not the first front door frame counter area is “0”. In this case, since the process is performed until the front door frame 14 is in the open state from the closed state until it is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state, in step S902, the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. The open specific reference value information stored in the first front door frame counter area is not yet “0”. Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S912, and the process proceeds to step S913.

  In step S913, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first front door frame counter area. In a succeeding step S914, it is determined whether or not the value of the first front door frame counter area is “0”. In other words, until the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is executed until the front door frame 14 is changed from the closed state to the open state and is specified to be in the open state, the first front door frame counter is executed. The area value is decremented by one. Moreover, since the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is executed as a part of the normal process, its execution cycle is about 4 msec. If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, “3” is stored in the first front door frame counter area in step S902. Therefore, in step S914, whether or not 12 msec has elapsed from the time when the front door frame 14 is opened and changed from the closed state to the open state (when the front door frame opening signal is output from the front door frame opening switch 78). Will be judged.

  If the value of the first front door frame counter area is not “0”, a negative determination is made in step S914, and the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated as it is. When the value of the first front door frame counter area is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S914, and the process proceeds to step S915. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the front door frame opening flag is stored in the front door frame opening flag storage area of the RAM 313. If the front door frame opening flag is stored, the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated as it is. If the front door frame release flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S916.

  In step S916, the front door frame release flag (front body release information) is stored in the front door frame release flag storage area (front body release information storage means). Thereby, it is specified in the CPU 311 that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. In the subsequent step S917, the front door frame state change flag is stored in the front door frame state change flag storage area of the RAM 313. Thereby, it is specified at the timing when the CPU 311 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In the subsequent step S918, a front door frame opening command is set. The front door frame opening command is output to the payout control board 322 in a payout output process described later, and the front door frame 14 is opened when the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 inputs the front door frame open command. Identify that there is.

  Thereafter, in step S910, a subcommand setting process is executed. In the sub-command setting process, a front door frame opening state command (front body opening notification information) is output to the sound lamp control board 324, and the front body opening notification is executed. The form of the front body opening notification is arbitrary. For example, lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, output of a notification sound from the speaker unit 26, notification display on the display screen of the symbol display device 91, and the like can be considered. Further, a front body opening signal may be output to the game hall management computer (hall computer) through the external terminal plate 213. Thereafter, the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the front door frame opening information is stored in the general-purpose register of the CPU 311, it is not immediately determined that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. When the front door frame opening information is confirmed continuously for the set opening specific reference number, that is, when the front door frame opening information is confirmed over the opening specific reference period, the front door frame 14 is in the open state. It is determined that Thus, when the front door frame opening information is stored in the second input port 352 or the general-purpose register due to noise or the like, although the front door frame 14 is not in the open state, the front door frame 14 is in the open state in the CPU 311. It is prevented from specifying that it became.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the front door frame 14 is opened due to the integration of the window 21, the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 with the front door frame 14, the game ball is paid out. Like to stop. This is because if the payout is not stopped, the game balls are connected from the position of the opening / closing member 124 of the main body frame 13 to the position of the payout device 224, and there is a concern about the failure of the payout device 224. In this case, it is not preferable that the CPU 311 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in an open state even though the front door frame 14 is not actually in an open state. Further, when the front door frame opening command is output to the payout control board 322 due to the influence of noise or the like, the command for canceling it is not output. If it does so, the state where the payout of the game ball is stopped will continue to be maintained, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, according to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that such inconvenience occurs.

  Next, a process when the front door frame 14 of (3) is specified to be in the open state and the open state is continued will be described.

  Since this time is the case where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S911, and “250” is stored in the second front door frame counter area of the RAM 313. In a succeeding step S912, it is determined whether or not the first front door frame counter area is “0”. Since this time is after the front door frame 14 is specified to be in an open state and the open state is continued, the first front door frame counter area is maintained at “0”. Yes. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S912, and the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated as it is.

  Next, a process until the front door frame 14 in the above (4) is changed from the open state to the closed state and is specified to be in the closed state will be described.

  Since this time is the case where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state, a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902, and “3” is stored in the first front door frame counter area of the RAM 313.

  In a succeeding step S903, it is determined whether or not the second front door frame counter area of the RAM 313 is “0”. This time, since the process is a process until the closed state is specified when the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the second front is determined in step S911 when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The closing specific reference count stored in the door frame counter area is not yet “0”. Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S903, and the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second front door frame counter area. In a succeeding step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the second front door frame counter area is “0”. That is, the second front door frame counter is executed each time the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is executed until the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state until it is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. The area value is decremented by one. Moreover, since the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is executed as a part of the normal process, its execution cycle is about 4 msec. If the front door frame 14 is in the open state, “250” is stored in the second front door frame counter area in step S911. Therefore, in step S905, 1 sec has elapsed since the time when the front door frame 14 was closed and changed from the open state to the closed state (when the output of the front door frame open signal from the front door frame open switch 78 was stopped). It is determined whether or not.

  If the value of the second front door frame counter area is not “0”, a negative determination is made in step S905, and the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated as it is. When the value of the second front door frame counter area is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S905, and the process proceeds to step S906. In step S906, it is determined whether or not the front door frame opening flag is stored in the front door frame opening flag storage area of the RAM 313. If the front door frame opening flag is not stored, the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated as it is. If the front door frame opening flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S907.

  In step S907, the front door frame opening flag stored in the front door frame opening flag storage area is deleted. Thereby, it is specified in the CPU 311 that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In the following step S908, the front door frame state change flag is stored in the front door frame state change flag storage area of the RAM 313. Thereby, it is specified at the timing when the CPU 311 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In the subsequent step S909, a front door frame closing command is set. The front door frame closing command is output to the payout control board 322 in a payout output process described later, and the front door frame 14 is closed when the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 inputs the front door frame close command. Identify that there is.

  Thereafter, in step S910, a subcommand setting process is executed. In this subcommand setting process, a front door frame closed state command (information for front body closing notification) is output to the sound lamp control board 324, and the front body opening notification is terminated. Thereafter, the front door frame opening signal monitoring process is terminated.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, even if the front door frame opening information is deleted from the general-purpose register of the CPU 311, it is not immediately determined that the front door frame 14 is closed, and is set as multiple times. When the state without the front door frame opening information is confirmed continuously for the number of consecutive closing reference times, that is, when the state without the front door frame opening information is confirmed over the closing specific reference period, It is specified that the frame 14 is closed. Thus, when the front door frame opening information is erased from the second input port 352 or the general-purpose register due to noise or the like even though the front door frame 14 is not in the closed state, the front door frame 14 is It is prevented that the closed state is specified.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 is configured to stop paying out the game balls when the front door frame 14 is in the open state and to resume paying out the game balls when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, Although the frame 14 is not closed, it is not preferable for the CPU 311 to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Further, when the front door frame closing command is output to the payout control board 322 due to the influence of noise or the like, the payout of the game ball is resumed even though the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If it does so, a game ball will continue from the position of the opening-and-closing member 124 of the main body frame 13 to the position of the payout device 224, and there is a concern about failure of the payout device 224. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, the possibility of such inconvenience occurring is reduced.

  In the main body frame opening signal monitoring process in step S804, description of specific processing contents for specifying the open state and the closed state of the main body frame 13 is omitted, but basically the front door frame opening signal monitoring process. The same processing is executed.

<Prize ball permission signal monitoring processing>
Next, the winning ball permission signal monitoring process in step S806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the winning ball permission signal will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as already described, the power from the power supply unit 321 c at the time of power interruption of the power supply and launch control board 321 is supplied to the RAM 313 of the main control board 301, but to the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. Is not supplied. With this configuration, the capacity of the power interruption unit 321c can be reduced, and accordingly, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  However, in this configuration, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, all the information stored in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is erased (destroyed). In this case, if all the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 as in the conventional pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 10 can be connected to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where there are unpaid prize balls. When the power supply is stopped, all the unpaid prize balls are erased without being paid out. If it does so, it will cause a great disadvantage to a player.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, unpaid prize ball information is basically stored in the prize ball counter area 361 of the RAM 313 of the main control board 301, and the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 stores the payout control board 322. When a prize ball permission signal is input from the CPU 331, a prize ball command is output to the CPU 331. Then, in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 is the maximum number of prize balls (15 prize balls) for one winning at a maximum. The output start timing and output stop timing of the winning ball permission signal are set so as to be the sum of the permitted reference number. In addition, this permission reference number is the minimum number of winning balls for one winning or less. Thereby, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in a situation where a large number of unpaid prize balls remain, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls to be erased as much as possible. That is, the prize ball permission signal is information output from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 in order to specify the output timing of the prize ball command in the CPU 311 of the main control board 301.

  In the prize ball permission signal monitoring process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not prize ball permission information indicating that a prize ball permission signal is input is stored in the seventh bit D7 of the first input port 351. To do. In the prize ball permission signal monitoring process, the information of the first input port 351 may be stored in a general-purpose register or a dedicated register of the CPU 311. In this case, whether or not the prize ball permission information is stored in the register. Is determined.

  If the winning ball permission information is stored, the value stored in the winning ball permission counter area (permission grasping means) 365 of the RAM 313 of the main control board 301 is “5” or more in step S1002. It is determined whether or not there is. The prize ball permission counter area 365 means that the prize ball permission signal is actually output from the payout control board 322 when the prize ball permission information is stored in the first input port 351. This is for the CPU 311 to specify whether the data is stored due to noise or the like.

  If the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365 is “5” or more, an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, and the present winning ball permission signal monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365 is less than “5”, a negative determination is made in step S1002, and the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, after 1 is added to the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365, the winning ball permission signal monitoring process is terminated.

  Here, since the prize ball permission signal monitoring process is executed as a part of the normal process, its execution cycle is about 4 msec. Therefore, when a prize ball permission signal is output from the payout control board 322 and the value of the prize ball permission counter area 365 is less than “5”, the value of the prize ball permission counter area 365 is set to 1 at a cycle of about 4 msec. Is added. Further, by executing the processing of step S1002, the value of the prize ball permission counter area 365 becomes “5” or more even in a situation where the output of the prize ball permission signal from the payout control board 322 is continued. In the case where the winning ball is permitted, the process of adding the value in the winning ball permission counter area 365 is not executed.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that no winning ball permission information is stored, the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365 is cleared to “0” in step S1004, and then the present winning ball permission signal monitoring process is performed. Exit. That is, in a situation where no prize ball permission signal is output from the payout control board 322, the value of the prize ball permission counter area 365 is maintained at “0”.

<Output processing for withdrawal>
Next, the payout output process executed in step S508 of the normal process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The payout output process is a process for outputting various commands from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322.

  In the payout output process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the front door frame state change flag is stored in the front door frame state change flag storage area of the RAM 313 of the main control board 301. If the front door frame state change flag is stored, the front door frame state change flag is erased in step S1102, and a front door frame open command or front door frame close command is issued in step S1103. The output processing for the payout is finished after the output.

  On the other hand, if the front door frame state change flag is not stored in the front door frame state change flag storage area of the RAM 313 in step S1101, a negative determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the front door frame opening flag is stored in the front door frame opening flag storage area of the RAM 313. If the front door frame opening flag is stored, the payout output process is terminated as it is.

  If the front door frame release flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365 of the RAM 313 is “5” as the number of times for output permission reference. Here, as described above, the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365 is the value when the winning ball permission signal is output from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 and the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365 is less than “5”. Is incremented by 1 with a period of about 4 msec. The value of the prize ball permission counter area 365 is cleared to “0” when the output of the prize ball permission signal from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is stopped. Therefore, in step S1105, it is determined whether or not the output of the winning ball permission signal from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 has continued for 20 msec as the output permission continuation period.

  If the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365 is not “5”, the payout output process is terminated as it is. If the value of the winning ball permission counter area 365 is “5”, whether or not winning ball information is stored in any of the various counter areas 361a to 361d in the winning ball counter area 361 of the RAM 313 in step S1106. Determine whether or not. If no prize ball information is stored in any of them, the payout output process is terminated as it is.

  If prize ball information is stored in any of the various prize ball counter areas 361a to 361d, the value of the prize ball permission counter area 365 is cleared to “0” in step S1107. Thereafter, a prize ball command output process is executed in step S1108, and the payout output process ends.

  Here, the prize ball command output processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value of the 15 prize ball counter area 361a in the RAM 313 is "0". If it is not “0”, it means that incomplete information of prize balls is stored for 15 prize balls, so that 15 prize ball commands are output to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 in step S1202. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter area 361a for 15 prize balls. Thereafter, the prize ball command output process is terminated.

  If the value of the 15 prize ball counter area 361a is “0” in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the four prize ball counter area 361c in the RAM 313 is "0". If it is not “0”, it means that incomplete information on prize balls is stored for the four prize balls, so that the four prize ball commands are output to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 in step S1204. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter area 361c for four prize balls. Thereafter, the prize ball command output process is terminated.

  If the value of the four award ball counter area 361c is “0” in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the value of the three prize ball counter area 361d in the RAM 313 is “0”. If it is not “0”, it means that incomplete information of prize balls is stored for three prize balls, and therefore, in step S1206, three prize ball commands are output to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter area 361d for three prize balls. Thereafter, the prize ball command output process is terminated.

  If the value of the three prize ball counter area 361d is “0” in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, the 10 award balls command is output to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322, and the value of the 10 award ball counter area 361b is decremented by 1. Thereafter, the prize ball command output process is terminated.

  As described above, even if the prize ball permission information is stored in the first input port 351, the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 cannot immediately specify that the output of the prize ball command is permitted in the payout control board 322. If the award ball permission information is confirmed continuously for the number of output permission reference times set as a plurality of times, that is, it is confirmed that the award ball permission signal is output over the output permission reference period of 20 msec. If it is determined that the output of the prize ball command is permitted (identify that the output is permitted). Then, by specifying that the output of the winning ball command is permitted, one winning ball command corresponding to one winning is output to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. Since the output permission reference period is set in this way, as described above, when prize ball permission information is stored in the first input port 351, it is sent from the payout control board 322 as a prize ball permission signal. The CPU 311 can specify whether the data is stored due to the output of the "?" Or stored due to noise or the like. Therefore, when the prize ball permission information is stored due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the prize ball command from being output.

  In particular, as will be described later, the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 cannot store a prize ball number exceeding a predetermined maximum reference number. In this case, if the prize ball permission information is stored due to noise or the like and a prize ball command is output for that information, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command is erased without actually being paid out. End up. This will be detrimental to the player. On the other hand, according to this configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience.

<Processing Configuration in CPU 331 of Dispensing Control Board 322>
Next, a processing configuration in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 will be described. The processing of the CPU 331 can be broadly divided into input interrupt processing activated by input of a command from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301, main processing activated upon power-on, and periodically (in the present embodiment). There is a timer interrupt process activated at a cycle of 2 msec. In the input interrupt process, the command input this time is stored in the storage area corresponding to the read pointer in the ring buffer provided in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. Hereinafter, main processing and timer interrupt processing will be described.

<Main processing>
The main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset at power-on.

  First, in step S1301, initial setting associated with power-on is executed. In the subsequent step S1302, initial display processing is executed. In the initial display process, “0” is displayed on the 7-segment display 242a provided on the payout control board 322 as an initial display.

  In subsequent step S1303, RAM access is permitted, and in step S1304, an external interrupt vector is set. Thereafter, the entire area of the RAM 333 is cleared to “0” in step S1305, and the CPU peripheral device is initialized in step S1306. In the subsequent step S1307, an interrupt is permitted. The series of processes from step S1301 to step S1307 corresponds to the start-up process in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322, and 300 msec is required until the start-up process is completed. The time required for the start-up process is not limited to 300 msec, and is arbitrary as long as it is shorter than the time required for the start-up process in the CPU 311 of the main control board 301.

  Thereafter, the process of step S1307 is repeatedly executed until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Note that, by repeatedly executing the interrupt permission setting process in step S1307 in this way, even if the interrupt permission setting is canceled due to the influence of noise or the like and the non-permitted setting is made, the interrupt permission state is restored. Can be set again.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing started by the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 every 2 msec, for example, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, the state return switch 245 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed. Thereafter, a command determination process is executed in step S1402, a full tank process is executed as a process related to a full tank state of the lower plate 34 in step S1403, and a ball useless process is executed as a process related to the absence of a ball in the tank 221 in step S1404. In step S1405, a prize ball setting process is executed as a process related to the setting of the number of prize balls. In step S1406, a ball rental setting process is executed as a process related to the setting of a rental ball. A payout number setting process is executed as a process related to the setting of the game ball, a payout control process is executed as a process related to payout of the game ball in step S1408, and a prize ball permission signal setting process is executed as a process related to setting of the prize ball permission signal in step S1409. After executing, this timer interrupt processing ends.

  Hereinafter, a command determination process in step S1402, a full tank process in step S1403, a ball non-use process in step S1404, a prize ball setting process in step S1405, a rent setting process in step S1406, a payout number setting process in step S1407, and step S1408. The payout control process and the winning ball permission signal setting process in step S1409 will be described in detail.

<Command judgment processing>
First, the command determination processing in step S1402 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Here, as described above, the command input from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer provided in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 by executing the interrupt process at the time of input. In the command determination process, the information stored in the storage area corresponding to the current read pointer is read from each storage area of the ring buffer, and the process corresponding to the read information is executed.

  In the command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the information read in step S1501 is an initial command. If it is an initial command, the initial display canceling process is executed in step S1502, and then the command determining process is terminated. In the initial display cancellation process, the initial display on the 7-segment display 242a is terminated.

  If the read information is not an initial command, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not it is a prize ball command. If the command is a prize ball command, the command determination process is terminated after the command storage process is executed in step S1504. In the command storage process, a prize ball command is stored in the command storage area 373 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322.

  If the read information is not a prize ball command, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not it is a front door frame opening command. If the command is a front door frame opening command, the front door frame opening flag (payment side front body opening information) is stored in the front door frame opening flag storage area (payment side front body opening information storage means) of the RAM 333 in step S1506. After storing, this command determination process is terminated.

  If the read information is not a front door frame opening command, it is determined in step S1507 whether or not it is a front door frame closing command. If it is a front door frame closing command, the command determination process is terminated after the front door frame opening flag is deleted from the front door frame opening flag storage area of the RAM 333 in step S1508. If it is not a front door frame release command, this command determination process is terminated as it is.

<Full tank processing>
Next, the full tank process in step S1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the full tank process, it is determined whether or not the lower dish 34 is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor 59 provided in the front door side lower dish passage 52 to the lower dish 34, and various processes are executed. Is done. Then, when the game ball is not detected by the full tank detection sensor 59, the processing after step S1602 is executed, and when the game ball is detected, the processing after step S1609 is executed. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the processing after step S1609 will be described and then the processing after step S1602 will be described.

  In the full tank process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether a full tank detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 59 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the full tank detection information indicating that the full tank detection signal is input is stored in the input port of the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322.

  If a full tank detection signal has been input, the second full counter area in the full tank counter area 371 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is cleared to “0” in step S1609. The second full tank counter area is a counter for measuring a period during which the full tank detection signal is not continuously input from the full tank detection sensor 59. Thereafter, in step S1610, the value of the first full counter area in the full counter area 371 is incremented by one. The first full tank counter area is a counter for measuring a period during which a full tank detection signal is continuously input from the full tank detection sensor 59.

  After step S1610, it is specified in step S1611 whether or not the first full counter area is “850” as the count value corresponding to the first full specific identification period. Here, this full tank process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 2 msec as described above. Therefore, when a full tank detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 59, 1 is added to the first full tank counter area at a cycle of about 2 msec, and therefore the full tank detection signal is set to about 1.7 sec (step S1611). It is determined whether it continues over the 1st full tank specific reference period).

  When the first full tank counter area is “850”, it is determined that the lower plate 34 is full, and the process proceeds to step S1612. That is, when the lower tray 34 is full, the game balls are lined up in the front door-side lower tray passage 52, so that the game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor 59 and the full tank detection signal is output. Will continue. And about 1.7 sec continues in this state, it is specified that the lower pan 34 is a full tank state. As described above, the period for which the lower tray 34 is specified to be full is set to 1.7 sec. If the period is extremely long, the game balls are connected to the position of the payout device 224 and the payout motor 257 and the like are set. This is because there is a risk of failure, and if the period is extremely short, it may be specified that the lower tray 34 is in a full state although it is not full.

  In step S1612, it is determined whether or not a full tank flag (full tank state information) is stored in the full tank flag storage area (full tank state information storage means) of the RAM 333. If the full tank flag is stored, the full tank process is terminated as it is. If the full tank flag is not stored, the full tank flag is stored in step S1613 and the full tank process is terminated after setting the full tank state. When the full tank state is set, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 starts to output a full tank signal to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 and outputs a full tank signal while the full tank state is set. State is maintained.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first full counter area is not “850” in step S1611, the first full counter area in step S1614 is “0” as the count value corresponding to the second full tank specific reference period. It is determined whether or not “400”. As described above, since the first full counter area is incremented by 1 with a period of about 2 msec, whether or not the full tank detection signal is continuously input for about 0.8 sec (second full tank specific reference period) in step S1614. Judging.

  If the first full tank counter area is not “400”, the full tank processing is ended as it is. If the first full counter area is “400”, it is determined that the lower tray 34 may be full, and the process proceeds to step S1615. In step S1615, the full tank low speed flag (full tank low speed information) is stored in the full tank low speed flag storage area (full tank low speed information storage means) of the RAM 333. Thereafter, the full tank processing is terminated.

  By storing the full tank low speed flag, the CPU 331 sets the payout speed of the payout motor 257 as will be described later from the normal period until that time (specifically, the game ball is paid out at intervals of 60 msec). (Specifically, the game ball is paid out at intervals of 600 msec).

  The reason why the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is switched to the low speed cycle in this way is as follows. That is, the full tank detection sensor 59 is configured to continuously output a full tank detection signal while the game ball is being detected. Therefore, when the interval between game balls that are continuously paid out becomes narrow, the full tank detection sensor 59. From the viewpoint, the end of the detection period of one game ball is later than the start of the detection period of the next game ball. Then, although the lower plate 34 is not in the full state, the full tank detection signal is continuously output from the full tank detection sensor 59. And if this state continues, it will be specified that the lower pan 34 is a full tank state.

  On the other hand, as described above, by switching the payout speed of the payout motor 257 to the low speed cycle, the interval between the game balls passing through the front door side lower dish passage 52 continuously becomes wide. More specifically, this interval exceeds the detection range of the full tank detection sensor 59. Therefore, since the output of the full tank detection signal that has been continued is interrupted, it is possible to prevent the lower tray 34 from being identified as being full even though it is not full.

  Returning to the description of the full tank process, if the full tank detection signal is not input from the full tank detection sensor 59 in step S1601, the first full counter area is cleared to “0” in step S1602. Thereafter, in step S1603, it is determined whether or not the full tank low speed flag is stored in the full tank low speed flag storage area of the RAM 333. If the full tank low speed flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1605 as it is. If the full tank low speed flag is stored, the full tank low speed flag is deleted in step S1604, and then the process proceeds to step S1605.

  By erasing the full tank low speed flag, the CPU 331 basically changes the payout speed setting of the payout motor 257 from the low speed cycle to the normal cycle. That is, in the situation where the full tank detection signal is continuously output from the full tank detection sensor 59, the output of the full tank detection signal is interrupted by changing the payout speed of the payout motor 257 to a low speed cycle. The payout speed immediately returns to the normal cycle. Thereby, in the configuration in which the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is changed to a low speed cycle as necessary, the time required for paying out the game ball is prevented from becoming extremely long.

  In subsequent step S1605, 1 is added to the second full counter area. Thereafter, in step S1606, it is determined whether or not the second full counter area is “250”. Here, in the second full tank counter area, when a full tank detection signal is not input from the full tank detection sensor 59, 1 is added at a cycle of about 2 msec. Therefore, in step S1606, it is determined whether or not the state where no full detection signal is input continues for about 0.5 sec.

  If the second full tank counter area is not “250”, the full tank processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the second full tank counter area is “250”, it is determined in step S1607 whether the full tank flag is stored in the full tank flag storage area of the RAM 333. If the full tank flag is not stored, the full tank process is terminated as it is. If the full tank flag is stored, the full tank flag is deleted in step S1608 and the full tank release state is set. By setting the full tank release state, the output of the full tank signal from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 is stopped and the full tank release state is set while the full tank release state is set. The signal output stop state is maintained.

  Here, the process of step S1608 is executed after waiting for about 0.5 sec since the output of the full tank detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 59 is stopped in step S1606, and so on. It can be determined that the full tank state has not been released even though the game ball is actually waiting in the detection range of the full tank detection sensor 59 due to the influence of.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which determines whether it is more than a determination value in step S1606, step S1611, and step S1614, respectively.

<Useless ball>
Next, the ball useless process in step S1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the ball-free process, it is determined whether the tank 221 is in a ball-free state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor 223a provided on the case rail 223, and various processes are executed. Then, when a game ball is detected by the ball non-detection sensor 223a, the processing after step S1702 is executed, and when the game ball is not detected, the processing after step S1708 is executed. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the processing after step S1708 will be described and then the processing after step S1702 will be described.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a sphere non-detection signal is input from the sphere non-detection sensor 223a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ball non-detection information indicating that the ball non-detection signal is input is stored in the input port of the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322.

  If the ball non-detection signal is input, in step S1708, the second ball non-counter area in the ball non-counter area 372 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is cleared to “0”. The second sphere non-counter area is a counter for measuring a period during which no sphere non-detection signal is continuously input from the sphere non-detection sensor 223a. Thereafter, in step S1709, 1 is added to the value of the first non-sphere counter area in the non-sphere counter area 372. The first non-sphere counter area is a counter for measuring a period during which a non-sphere detection signal is continuously input from the non-sphere detection sensor 223a.

  After step S1709, it is specified in step S1710 whether or not the first sphere non-counter area is “5000” as the count value corresponding to the first sphere non-specific reference period. Here, the ball useless process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 2 msec as described above. Therefore, when a sphere non-detection signal is input from the sphere non-detection sensor 223a, 1 is added to the first sphere non-counter area at a cycle of about 2 msec. It is determined whether or not the sphere continues for the unspecified standard period.

  If the first full ball-free counter area is “5000”, it is determined that the tank 221 is free of balls, and the process proceeds to step S1711. In other words, when the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball, the game balls are not lined up in the case rail 223, so that the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor 223a and the output of the ball non-detection signal is continued. The Then, in this state, about 10 sec continues, and it is specified that the tank 221 is in a ball-free state.

  In step S1711, it is determined whether or not a sphere-less flag (sphere-less state information) is stored in the sphere-less flag storage area (sphere-less state information storage unit) of the RAM 333. If the ball no flag is stored, the ball useless processing is terminated as it is. If the no-sphere flag is not stored, the no-sphere flag is stored in step S1712 and the non-sphere state is set, and then the main ball useless process is terminated. By setting the no-ball state, the CPU 331 of the pay-out control board 322 starts to output a pay-out abnormality signal to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 and outputs the pay-out abnormality signal while the no-ball state is set. State is maintained.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first sphere non-counter area is not “5000” in step S1710, the first sphere non-counter area is set to “ It is determined whether or not “500”. As described above, since 1 is added to the first sphere non-counter area at a period of about 2 msec, whether or not the sphere non-detection signal is continuously input for about 1.0 sec (second sphere non-specific reference period) in step S1713. Judging.

  If the first ball no-counter area is not “500”, the main ball useless process is terminated. When the first ball-free counter area is “500”, it is determined that the tank 221 may be in a ball-free state, and the process proceeds to step S1714. In step S1714, a sphere no low speed flag (sphere no low speed information storage unit) in the RAM 333 is stored with a sphere no low speed flag (sphere no low speed information). Thereafter, the main ball useless process is terminated.

  By storing the ball no-low speed flag, the CPU 331 sets the payout speed of the payout motor 257 from the normal cycle until that time (specifically, the game ball is paid out at intervals of 60 msec) as described later. (Specifically, the game ball is paid out at intervals of 600 msec).

  The reason why the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is switched to the low speed cycle in this way is as follows. In other words, the tank 221 may be clogged with balls. On the other hand, the tank 221 is provided with a vibration motor for vibrating the tank 221 in order to eliminate the ball clogging when the ball clogging occurs. If the ball clogging is not severe, the ball clogging is eliminated by vibrating the tank 221 with a vibration motor. And it is considered that the elimination of the ball clogging is completed within 10 seconds.

  In this situation, when about 1.0 sec, which is the first ball unspecified reference period, has elapsed during which the game ball is not detected by the ball no-detection sensor 223a, the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is switched to the low speed cycle. Thus, the possibility that the ball clogging is eliminated at the timing before all the game balls waiting on the upstream side of the rotating body 256 of the payout device 224 disappears is increased. When all the game balls waiting on the upstream side of the rotating body 256 of the payout device 224 are lost, when the game balls are replenished from the tank 221 side toward the rotating body 256 again, It falls through the case rail 223 and directly collides with the rotating body 256, and there is a concern that the rotating body 256 may fail. On the other hand, the possibility that such an inconvenience occurs is reduced by switching the payout speed to the low speed cycle as described above.

  Returning to the description of the non-sphere processing, if the non-sphere detection signal is not input from the non-sphere detection sensor 223a in step S1701, the first non-sphere counter area is cleared to “0” in step S1702. Thereafter, in step S1703, 1 is added to the second non-sphere counter area. Thereafter, in step S1704, it is determined whether or not the second ball-free counter area is “1500”. Here, the second non-sphere counter area is incremented by 1 with a period of about 2 msec when no non-sphere detection signal is input from the non-sphere detection sensor 223a. Therefore, in step S1704, it is determined whether or not the state where no ball detection signal is input continues for about 3.0 seconds.

  If the second ball no-counter area is not “1500”, the main ball useless process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second ball-less counter area is “1500”, the ball-less low speed flag is erased from the ball no-low speed flag storage area of the RAM 333 in step S1705. By deleting the ball no low speed flag, the CPU 331 basically changes the setting of the payout speed of the payout motor 257 from the low speed cycle to the normal cycle.

  In a succeeding step S1706, it is determined whether or not the ballless flag is stored in the ballless flag storage area of the RAM 333. If no ball flag is stored, the ball useless process is terminated. If the ball no flag is stored, the ball no flag is erased in step S1707 and the ball no release state is set, and then the main ball useless process is terminated. By setting the ball non-release state, the output of the payout abnormality signal from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 is stopped and the payout abnormality is performed while the ball non-release state is set. The signal output stop state is maintained.

  Here, the process of step S1705 and step S1707 is executed after waiting for about 3.0 seconds after the output of the ball non-detection signal from the ball non-detection sensor 223a is stopped in step S1704. Due to the influence of noise or the like, it can be determined that the ball-free state has not been released even though the game ball is not actually waiting in the detection range of the ball-free detection sensor 223a.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which determines whether it is more than a determination value in step S1704, step S1710, and step S1713, respectively.

<Prize ball setting process>
Next, the winning ball setting process in step S1405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning ball setting process, the number of winning balls is specified from the winning ball command input from the CPU 331 of the main control board 301, and the specified winning ball number is added to the winning ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. Is executed.

  In the winning ball setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a winning ball command is stored in the command storage area 373 of the RAM 333. If no prize ball command is stored, the prize ball setting process is terminated. If a prize ball command is stored, the process advances to step S1802.

  In step S1802, a calculation process for a prize ball command is executed. Here, as described above, four types of prize ball commands are set: three prize ball commands, four prize ball commands, ten prize ball commands, and 15 prize ball commands. As shown in FIG. 25 (b), it is composed of 2 bytes composed of upper information and lower information. Each prize ball command is set such that the form of information consisting of 1 byte when the addition of the upper information and the lower information is calculated is “FF”. In step S1802, the above addition operation is executed for the prize ball command stored in the command storage area 373 of the RAM 333. The calculation result of addition is stored in a general-purpose register of the CPU 331.

  In the subsequent step S1803, the winning ball command stored in the command storage area 373 is deleted. In a succeeding step S1804, it is determined whether or not the result calculated in the step S1802 is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is “FF” in hexadecimal. If it is “FF”, it means that the current prize ball command is normal, and the process proceeds to step S1805.

  On the other hand, if it is not “FF”, the present prize ball command is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like in the command transmission path from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. This means that the award ball setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, the current prize ball command is deleted without being added to the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 as information on the number of prize balls. Thereby, when the prize ball command is rewritten due to the influence of noise or the like, damage to the game hall or the like can be reduced. That is, in the prize ball command, the lower information corresponds to the information on the number of prize balls, but the lower information is rewritten. For example, the number of prize balls should be 100 although the number of prize balls should be three. There is a risk that. On the other hand, as described above, by not adding the prize ball command as prize ball number information to the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333, information rewritten by the noise or the like is added. The damage to game halls will be reduced.

  Returning to the description of the winning ball setting process, in step S1805, a winning ball number specifying process is executed. Specifically, based on the information stored in the prize ball table storage area 332a of the ROM 332, it is specified which number of prize balls corresponds to the prize ball command input this time. In this case, the low-order information of the prize ball command is compared with the prize ball table storage area 332a, and the number of prize balls is specified. The number of prize balls specified here is stored in a general-purpose register of the CPU 331 instead of information on the prize ball command.

  Here, the information on the prize ball command may not match any information in the prize ball table storage area 332a due to the influence of noise or the like. In order to deal with this, the prize ball number specifying process may be configured to identify the number of prize balls from binary information in the lower information of the prize ball command. In this configuration, if the specified number of prize balls is 15 or more, which is the maximum number of game media, it is 15; if it is 14 to 10, it is 10; 9 to 4 If the number is 3, the number may be 3, and if the number is 3 to 1, the number may be 3.

  In a succeeding step S1806, a mask process at the time of addition is executed. In the addition mask process, information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 is equal to or less than a predetermined number of prize balls for correction at the time of addition (specifically, three). Perform logical product operation.

  Here, as will be described later, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 outputs the prize ball permission signal when the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 becomes three or less as the permitted reference number. And the prize ball command corresponding thereto is input from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 and the information of the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 becomes four or more, so that a prize ball permission signal is output. To stop. Therefore, when a prize ball command is input from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 and information on the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number storage area 374, the number is equal to or less than the permitted reference number stored in the prize ball number storage area 374. It should be (specifically, 3 or less).

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, noise or the like may occur at various timings, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 starts outputting the prize ball permission signal and before executing the prize ball number adding process. There is a possibility that information in the winning ball number storage area 374 may be rewritten. For example, if the information in the prize ball number storage area 374 is originally 3 pieces but is rewritten to 131 pieces or the like, it will cause a great disadvantage to the game hall. End up.

  On the other hand, in the addition mask processing in step S1806, the logical product is calculated so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 is three or less as the number of prize balls for correction at the time of addition. Perform the operation. In the present configuration, the number of prize balls for correction at the time of addition coincides with the permitted reference number.

  Thereafter, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not information on the number of prize balls to be added, that is, information on the number of prize balls specified in step S1805 is 1 or more. If the information on the number of prize balls to be added is “0”, the prize ball setting process is terminated. If the information on the number of prize balls to be added is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1808.

  In step S1808, it is determined whether the information on the number of prize balls to be added is less than “16”. If the information on the number of prize balls to be added is “16” or more, the prize ball setting process is terminated. If the information on the number of prize balls to be added is less than “16”, the process proceeds to step S1809. By executing the processing of steps S1807 and S1808 as described above, if the information on the number of prize balls to be added is abnormal, it can be invalidated.

  In the subsequent step S1809, an award ball number addition process is executed. In the addition process, the information on the number of prize balls specified in step S1805 is added to the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 after the addition mask process in step S1806.

  In subsequent step S1810, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 after the addition process is executed in step S1809 is stored in advance in the ROM 332 of the payout control board 322. It is determined whether or not the upper limit number of winning balls of 374 is exceeded. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 is “19” or more.

  If the information on the number of winning balls is less than “19”, the process proceeds to step S1812 as it is. If the information on the number of winning balls is “19” or more, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1811, post-addition correction processing is executed. Specifically, the information on the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area 374 is corrected to “18”. Thereby, when the information stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 exceeds the upper limit prize ball number due to the influence of noise or the like, it can be corrected to the upper limit prize ball number. Therefore, it can suppress that a game hall suffers a disadvantage. In addition, when the upper limit number of winning balls is exceeded, it is not invalidated (that is, set to “0”), and the player may suffer a disadvantage by correcting to the upper limit winning ball number. Absent.

  It should be noted that the abnormality in the number of prize balls can be carefully eliminated by executing the processes of step S1806, step S1807, step S1808, and step S1811. However, it is not essential to execute all these processes. For example, the processes in steps S1807 and S1808 may not be executed. Even in this case, the anomalies in the number of prize balls can be resolved by executing the processes in steps S1806 and S1811.

  In the subsequent step S1812, it is determined whether or not a prize ball low speed flag (prize ball low speed information) is stored in the prize ball low speed flag storage area (prize ball low speed information storage means) of the RAM 333. The prize ball low speed flag is a switching reference number (specifically, “2”) in which information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 is stored in advance in the ROM 332 of the payout control board 322. It is a flag that is stored in the event of a failure, and is erased when the switching reference number is exceeded.

  Here, when the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 becomes the switching reference number, the pachinko machine 10 sets the payout speed of the payout motor 257 in the normal cycle until then. It is comprised so that it may change into a low speed cycle. This is due to the following reason. That is, in the situation where the information on the number of prize balls is not stored in the prize ball number storage area 374, the driving of the payout motor 257 is stopped. In this case, if a single winning is repeatedly generated at predetermined intervals, it is necessary to repeatedly start and stop driving the payout motor 257. Since driving of the payout motor 257 requires a larger driving force than when the driving state of the payout motor 257 is maintained, it is not preferable that the driving start and stop of the payout motor 257 are repeatedly performed as described above. . On the other hand, when the information on the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number storage area 374 becomes the switching reference number, the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is switched to a low speed cycle so that a single winning can be achieved. Even if it repeatedly occurs at a predetermined interval, the possibility that the next winning will occur while executing the switching reference number of winning balls in a low-speed cycle is increased, and the start and stop of driving of the payout motor 257 are repeated. The possibility of being done is reduced.

  Although a configuration in which the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is always low is conceivable, in this case, the payout speed of the game ball is chronically slowed down, and the player receives a prize ball in spite of the occurrence of a win. It takes a considerable amount of time to receive, which is not preferable.

  If the prize ball low speed flag is not stored in the prize ball low speed flag storage area in step S1812, the process directly proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, if the prize ball low speed flag is stored, the prize ball low speed flag is erased from the prize ball low speed flag storage area in step S1813, and then the process proceeds to step S1814. When the prize ball low speed flag is deleted, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 becomes the switching reference number, so that the payout speed of the payout motor 257 set to the low speed period is the normal period. It will return to.

  In step S1814, an error flag erasing process is executed. The error flag is a flag stored when, for example, a command that cannot be analyzed is input from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301. The error flag is erased in step S1814 when a winning ball command is normally input and a winning ball setting process for the winning ball command is executed. After the error flag erasing process is executed in step S1814, the winning ball setting process is terminated.

<Rental setting process>
Next, the lending setting process in step S1406 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the ball lending setting process, the number of balls to be rented is specified based on the ball lending request signal input from the ball lending device Y through the ball lending connection terminal board 249, and the specified number of balls to be lended in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is used. A process of adding to the ball number storage area 375 is executed.

  In the lending setting process, first in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a lending state flag (lending state information) is stored in a lending state flag storage area (lending state information storage means) in the RAM 333. The ball rental status flag is a flag used in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to identify whether or not the ball rental request signal from the ball rental apparatus Y is in an input standby state, and is in an input standby state. And is deleted when it is no longer necessary to receive a lending request signal.

  When the lending status flag is not stored, the lending status setting process of steps S1902 to S1906 is executed. When the lending status flag is stored, the lending status of steps S1907 to S1911 is stored. Perform state processing.

  In the lending state setting process, first, in step S1902, it is determined whether or not a connection confirmation signal and a lending standby signal are input from the lending device Y. The connection confirmation signal is a signal indicating a state in which communication with the payout control board 322 is possible in the ball lending apparatus Y. In addition, the ball lending standby signal is stored in the ball lending device Y with information on unpaid balls (specifically, a card on which information on unpaid balls has been stored is held in the ball lending device Y). This is a signal for allowing the payout control board 322 to grasp that the ball lending button 37 of the ball lending operation device 36 is being operated in the situation where it is inserted. The connection confirmation signal may be omitted.

  If neither one of the connection confirmation signal and the lending standby signal is input, the lending setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if both the connection confirmation signal and the lending standby signal have been input, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not there is a payout error state. The payout error state is a state corresponding to any of the front door frame open state, the lower pan full state, the tank ball free state, or the payout device abnormal state.

  The determination is made by determining whether the front door frame opening flag is stored in the front door frame opening flag storage area of the RAM 333 for the front door frame opening state, and for the lower pan full state, This is performed by determining whether or not the full tank flag is stored in the full tank flag storage area, and for the tank ball no state, it is determined whether or not the ball no flag storage area of the RAM 333 is stored. The payout device abnormal state is determined by determining whether or not the payout device abnormal state flag is stored in the payout device abnormal state flag storage area of the RAM 333.

  If it is in the payout error state, the present lending setting process is terminated as it is. If it is not a payout error state, it is determined in step S1904 whether a payout operation is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the payout motor 257 is stopped. The situation in which the lending status flag is not stored and the payout motor 257 is in operation is a situation in which a payout of a prize ball is being executed or a lending operation based on one lending operation has already been performed. It means that the payout is being executed. In other words, it can be said that it is determined in step S1904 whether or not a winning ball operation is being performed or a lending operation based on a single lending operation is being performed.

  If the payout operation is in progress, the present lending setting process is terminated as it is. If the payout operation is not in progress, the output state of the lending permission signal is set in step S1905. As a result, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 starts outputting a ball lending permission signal to the ball lending device Y, and the ball lending device Y inputs the ball lending permission signal so that the ball lending button 37 can be operated once. Based on the ball rental request signal output. Thereafter, after storing the lent state flag in the lent state state flag storage area of the RAM 333 in step S1906, the present lent setting process is terminated. In addition, the ball lending device Y has not operated the ball lending button 37 when the lending permission signal is not input for a predetermined period (for example, 2 sec) after the lending standby signal is output. Treat as.

  In the ball lending state processing in steps S1907 to S1911, it is first determined in step S1907 whether or not a ball lending request signal is input from the ball lending apparatus Y. The ball lending request signal is a signal that is output when a ball lending device Y requests a lending of a ball. If the ball rental request signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S1909. If a ball rental request signal has been input, in step S1908, addition processing to the ball rental number storage area 375 of the RAM 333 is executed, and then the flow proceeds to step S1909. In the addition process, information on the number of lent balls corresponding to 25 pieces corresponding to 100 yen is added to the rented number storage area 375. That is, the ball lending apparatus Y periodically outputs a ball lending request signal in accordance with a ball lending operation in the lending state, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is predetermined every time a ball lending request signal is input. Information on the number of lent balls corresponding to the number of units is added to the rented number storage area 375.

  In step S1909, it is determined whether or not an end signal is input from the ball lending apparatus Y. The end signal is a signal that is output when one ball lending operation is performed and the ball lending request signal is output five times, and the payout control that the output of the ball lending request signal for one ball lending operation is completed. This is a signal for the CPU 331 of the substrate 322 to recognize. If the end signal is not input, the present lending setting process is ended as it is. If the end signal is input, the renting status flag is erased from the renting status flag storage area of the RAM 333 in step S1910, and the output stop status of the renting permission signal is set in step S1911. The rented ball setting process is terminated.

  Incidentally, in a situation where the ball lending device Y outputs a ball lending request signal to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 based on one lending operation, even if the lending operation is continuously performed, Until the output of the lending permission signal from the CPU 331 of the control board 322 is newly started, the lending request signal based on the lending operation is not performed. Therefore, only the information on the number of rents based on one rent operation is stored in the rented number storage area 375 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. In the situation where the ball lending device Y outputs a ball lending request signal to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 based on one lending operation, even if a new lending operation is performed, it is invalidated. It is good also as a structure to make.

  As described above, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is set to the ball lending state when the ball lending standby signal is input from the ball lending device Y and the payout waiting state is not in the payout error state and not in the payout operation. . In particular, even if a ball lending operation is performed in the ball lending operation device 36 while the payout of the prize ball is being executed, the lending state is not set during the payout operation. Priority can be given to paying out prize balls.

  Assuming a configuration in which priority is given to a ball lending operation when a ball lending operation is performed in a situation where a prize ball is being paid out, information on the number of prize balls is stored in the award ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. However, it is necessary to stop paying out the prize balls. In this case, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, the information on the number of winning balls is erased as the power-off power is not supplied to the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 as described above. On the other hand, the ball lending device Y has its own function of holding information when power is interrupted (that is, information on unpaid balls is stored and stored in a card), so that award balls are paid out. If the ball lending device Y does not receive a ball lending request signal, the information on the number of balls lent is retained in the ball lending device Y, and even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, The information on the number of balls is not erased. In the above circumstances, even if a ball lending operation is performed in a situation where a prize ball is being dispensed, the prize ball information will be erased without actually being dispensed by giving priority to the prize ball. It is prevented.

<Payout quantity setting process>
Next, the payout number setting process in step S1407 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the payout number setting process, the information stored in the winning ball number storage area 374 or the rented number storage area 375 of the RAM 333 is stored in the payout number counter area 376 of the RAM 333, which is an execution area when paying out game balls. Is executed.

  In the payout number setting process, first in step S2001, a payout setting time mask process is executed. In the payout setting mask process, the logical product is calculated so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 is equal to or less than a predetermined number of prize balls for correction at the time of payout. .

  Here, as will be described later, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 outputs the prize ball permission signal when the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 becomes three or less, which is the permitted reference number. Is received from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 and the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 becomes four or more as the non-permitted reference number. Stop outputting the prize ball permission signal. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the maximum number of winning balls for one winning is 15. In the above configuration, the upper limit number of winning balls in the winning ball number storage area 374 is 18 which is the sum of the permitted reference number and the maximum number of winning winning balls.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, noise and the like may occur at various timings, and after setting the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 in the prize ball setting process (FIG. 40). There is a possibility that the information in the prize ball number storage area 374 may be rewritten before the payout of game balls for the number of prize balls is completed. For example, when the information in the prize ball number storage area 374 is originally 10 pieces but is rewritten to 131 pieces or the like, the game hall is greatly disadvantaged. End up.

  On the other hand, in the payout setting time mask process in step S2001, the logical product is calculated so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 is 31 or less as the number of prize balls for correction at the time of payout. Execute the operation.

  In a succeeding step S2002, it is determined whether or not the ball removing operation is being performed. The ball removal operation refers to an operation for discharging the game balls stored in the tank 221 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the procedure of the ball removing operation will be described. First, the supply from the island facility to the tank 221 is stopped. Thereafter, the front door frame 14 is opened, and a large number of game balls are put into the variable winning device 83 by hand. After that, by closing the front door frame 14, the payout control board from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 in response to the prize ball permission signal being output from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301. A prize ball command is output to the CPU 331 of 322, and a payout of the game ball by the payout device 224 is executed.

  Thereafter, when there is no game ball stored in the tank 221, a ball non-detection signal is output from the ball non-detection sensor 223a, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 224 is stopped. In this case, by operating a ball removal operation switch 223b provided on the case rail 223, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 sets the ball removal state. Specifically, the ball removal state flag is stored in the ball removal state flag storage area of the RAM 333. As a result, even when a ball non-detection signal is output from the ball non-detection sensor 223a, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 224 is resumed, and is downstream of the ball removal operation switch 223b and the payout device 224. The game balls connected to the position of the payout motor 257 are discharged. Then, when the game ball is discharged, the ball removal from the tank 221 is completed. At this time, the setting of the ball removal state is canceled. That is, the ball removal state flag stored in the ball removal state flag storage area of the RAM 333 is deleted.

  In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the ball removal state is set. If the ball removal state is not set, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not it is a payout error state. The payout error state has already been described. If it is in the payout error state, the payout number setting process is terminated as it is. This prevents the game ball from being paid out in the payout error state.

  If it is not a payout error state, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not it is a retry state. The retry state is a state in which the rotating body 256 of the payout device 224 is subjected to a process of alternately repeating a normal rotation performed during normal payout and a reverse rotation opposite to the normal rotation. When the payout motor 257 is executing a payout operation and the CPU 331 does not specify that a game ball payout has been detected for a predetermined period of time, a retry state is set in a payout monitoring process to be described later. The flag is stored and set to the retry state. Whether or not the retry state is set is determined by determining whether or not the retry state flag is stored in the retry state flag storage area of the RAM 333.

  If it is in the retry state, the payout number setting process is terminated as it is, and if it is not in the retry state, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not a ball rental operation is in progress. The renting operation is in a state where the renting status flag is stored in the renting status flag storage area of the RAM 333 or the renting number information is stored in the renting number storage area 375 of the RAM 333. Say. If the rented state flag is stored or if the number of rented balls is stored in the number of rented balls storage area 375, the information on the number of rented balls storage area 375 is stored in the payout number counter of the RAM 333 in step S2006. After updating to the area 376, the payout number setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the ball rental status flag is not stored and the ball rental number storage area 375 does not store the ball rental number information, the information of the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 is stored in step S2007. After updating the payout number counter area 376 of the RAM 333, the payout number setting process is terminated. Even when the ball removal state is set in step S2002, after the information in the prize ball number storage area 374 in the RAM 333 is updated to the payout number counter area 376 in the RAM 333 in step S2007, the actual payout number setting is performed. The process ends.

<Discharge control processing>
Next, the payout control process in step S1408 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the payout control process, a process of paying out game balls is executed based on information stored in the payout number counter area 376 of the RAM 333, and a process of monitoring fraud with respect to the payout ball detection sensor 258 of the payout device 224 is performed. Executed.

  In the payout control process, a payout state setting process is first executed in step S2101 and a drive signal output process is executed in subsequent step S2102. Here, the payout state setting process and the drive signal output process will be described. First, the payout state setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the payout state setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not there is a payout error state. The payout error state has already been described. If it is in the payout error state, in step S2207, a stop state is set to stop the payout operation of the payout motor 257, and then the payout state setting process is terminated. The stop state is set by storing a stop state flag in the stop state flag storage area of the RAM 333 and a flag corresponding to any of the normal state flag storage area, the low speed state flag storage area, and the retry state flag storage area of the RAM 333. This is done by erasing the flag if it is stored. The normal state flag and the low speed state flag will be described later. In addition, when already set to the stop state, that state is maintained.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that there is no payout error state, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not the value in the payout number counter area 376 of the RAM 333 is “0”. If the value of the payout number counter area 376 is “0”, it means that there is no game ball to be paid out, so that after the payout motor 257 is set to the stop state in step S2207, this payout is made. The state setting process ends.

  If the value in the payout number counter area 376 is not “0” in step S2202, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not it is in a retry state. In the retry state, the payout motor 257 performs a retry-only operation, and thus the payout state setting process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. If not in the retry state, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not a low speed flag is stored in any low speed flag storage area of the RAM 333. That is, it is determined whether or not the full tank low speed flag is stored in the full tank low speed flag storage area, whether or not the ball no low speed flag is stored in the ball no low speed flag storage area, and the winning ball low speed flag is determined. It is determined whether or not a prize ball low speed flag is stored in the storage area.

  If no low speed flag is stored, in step S2206, the normal state is set so that the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is the normal cycle, and then the payout state setting process is terminated. The normal state is set when the normal state flag is stored in the normal state flag storage area of the RAM 333 and the flag corresponding to either the stop state flag storage area or the low speed state flag storage area of the RAM 333 is stored. This is done by deleting the flag. If the normal cycle has already been set, that state is maintained.

  On the other hand, if any of the low speed flags is stored, in step S2205, after setting the low speed state so that the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is a low speed cycle, this payout state setting process is terminated. To do. The low speed state is set when the low speed state flag is stored in the low speed state flag storage area of the RAM 333 and a flag corresponding to either the stop state flag storage area or the normal state flag storage area of the RAM 333 is stored. This is done by deleting the flag. If the low speed cycle is already set, this state is maintained.

  Next, drive signal output processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drive signal output process is a process for controlling the drive of the payout motor 257 by outputting a drive signal of one pulse from the CPU 331 to the motor driver 334 based on the result of the payout state setting process.

  In the drive signal output process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is stopped. If it is in a stopped state, the drive signal output process is terminated as it is. If it is not a stop state, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not it is a retry state. If not in the retry state, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not it is in the normal state.

  If it is in the normal state, a one-pulse drive signal is output to the motor driver 334 in step S2304. Here, the payout control process having the drive signal output process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), and the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 2 msec. Is also activated at a cycle of about 2 msec. Therefore, when the normal state is set, one pulse of drive signal is output at a cycle of about 2 msec.

  As described above, when the driving signal of 60 pulses is output from the CPU 331, the rotating body 256 advances 60 steps and makes one rotation, and when the rotating body 256 makes one rotation, two game balls are led out to the downstream side. The That is, one game ball is paid out by outputting a drive signal of 30 pulses. In the normal state, as described above, one pulse of the drive signal is output at a cycle of about 2 msec, so that one game ball is paid out from the payout device 224 at a cycle of 60 msec.

  The output period of the drive signal in the normal state is not limited to 2 msec and is arbitrary. In this case, for example, when the output cycle is set to a cycle slower than 2 msec, such as 6 msec, it may be configured to determine whether or not the output timing is for the normal state after an affirmative determination in step S2303. .

  In step S2304, after one pulse of drive signal is output, the process proceeds to step S2305 to update information in the drive counter area 378 of the RAM 333. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the drive counter area 378. Thereafter, the drive signal output process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2303 that the current state is not the normal state, it is determined in step S2306 whether the output timing is for the low speed state. If it is not the output timing for the low speed state, the drive signal output processing is finished as it is, and if it is the output timing for the low speed state, a one-pulse drive signal is output to the motor driver 334 in step S2304.

  In this case, whether or not it is the output timing for the low speed state is determined by determining whether or not a negative determination is made ten times in step S2306 after the low speed state is set. Since each process in the drive signal output process is started at a cycle of about 2 msec as described above, it is determined in step S2306 whether or not substantially 20 msec has elapsed, and one pulse of drive signal is output at a cycle of about 20 msec. The

  As already described, one game ball is paid out by outputting a drive signal of 30 pulses from the CPU 331. In the low-speed state, as described above, one pulse of drive signal is output at a cycle of about 20 msec, so that one game ball is paid out from the payout device 224 at a cycle of 600 msec.

  In step S2304, after outputting one pulse of drive signal, the process proceeds to step S2305 as described above, and information in the drive counter area 378 of the RAM 333 is updated. Thereafter, the drive signal output process is terminated.

  Here, the information in the drive counter area 378 is updated after the one-pulse drive signal is output, that is, in either the normal state or the low-speed state in which the output cycle of the one-pulse drive signal is different. The value in the counter area 378 is incremented by one. The drive counter area 378 is used to drive and control the payout motor 257 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 and to identify an abnormality in the payout operation through the payout motor 257. The CPU 331 adds 1 to the value of the drive counter area 378 when one pulse of the drive signal is output to the drive counter area 378 having such a function in both the normal state and the low speed state. The processing related to the driving of the payout motor 257 and the processing related to the specification of the abnormality of the payout operation are made to correspond to the payout speed (payout period) from the payout device 224 while using the same electrical configuration and processing configuration. It becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of the drive signal output process, if it is in the retry state in step S2302, the drive signal output process is terminated after executing the retry operation process in step S2307. In the retry operation process, after the retry state is set, the reverse rotation at the speed of 25 step / sec and the forward rotation at the speed of 50 step / sec are alternately performed for 1 sec. A drive signal is output to the payout motor 257 so that the setting is performed. In the retry operation process, the value of the drive counter area 378 is incremented by 1 each time a drive signal is output.

  Returning to the explanation of the payout control process (FIG. 43), after executing the drive signal output process in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103 to execute the ball detection process. In the ball detection process, it is determined using the payout specifying counter area 380 of the RAM 333 whether or not a game ball has been paid out.

  The sphere detection process will be specifically described below. As already described, when a game ball does not pass through the detection unit 258a of the payout ball detection sensor 258, information “0” (payout non-detection information) is stored in the input port of the CPU 331, and the game ball passes. If it is, information “1” (payout detection information) is stored in the input port of the CPU 331. When one game ball passes through the detection unit 258a, the state where the information “0” is stored is switched to the state where the information “1” is stored, and the information “1” is stored. After the state continues for a predetermined period, the state returns to the state where the information of “0” is stored.

  In the sphere detection process, the switching from the state where the information “0” is stored to the state where the information “1” is stored is monitored. Then, it is specified that the information “1” is switched to the stored state, and based on that, it is specified that one game ball has been paid out. That is, the CPU 331 specifies that one game ball has been paid out based on the start of detection of the game ball by the payout ball detection sensor 258.

  In this case, the ball detection process does not specify that one game ball has been paid out immediately when the switch to the state in which the information “1” is stored is confirmed, but “1”. When the state is switched to the state where the information is stored and the state where the information “1” is stored is confirmed over a predetermined number of times, it is determined that one game ball has been paid out. Specifically, after the state where the information “0” is stored is confirmed, when the state where the information “1” is stored is confirmed twice in succession, one game ball is paid out. Identify that it was issued. In this confirmation, the payout specifying counter area 380 is used. Thus, when the payout detection information is stored in the input port of the CPU 331 due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the CPU 331 from specifying that one game ball has been paid out. When it is specified in the ball detection process that one game ball has been paid out, the payout specific flag is stored in the payout specific flag storage area of the RAM 333.

  It should be noted that in the normal cycle, the former state is continuously three times or more from the state where the information “1” is stored until the state where the information “0” is stored is confirmed. Confirmed 10 times. In the low-speed cycle, the former state is continuously changed three times or more from the state where the information “1” is stored until the state where the information “0” is stored. Confirmed 20 times.

  After executing the ball detection process, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not the process result of the ball detection process is a process result indicating that one game ball has been paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a payout specifying flag (payout specifying information) is stored in the RAM 333. If the payout identification flag is not stored, the payout monitoring process is executed in step S2105, and then the payout control process is terminated. In the payout monitoring process, a process of determining whether or not the payout device 224 is normal is executed. Details of the payout monitoring process will be described later.

  If the payout identification flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2106 to execute initialization processing. In the initialization process, initialization of information used for executing a process for determining whether or not the payout device 224 is normal is executed. Details of the initialization process will be described later. If the determination in step S2104 is affirmative, the payout identification flag is deleted.

  In a succeeding step S2107, it is determined whether or not a ball rental operation is being performed. If the ball lending operation is not in progress, the payout control process is terminated after the prize ball subtraction process in steps S2108 to S2112 is executed. On the other hand, if the renting operation is being performed, the payout subtraction process in steps S2113 to S2114 is executed, and then the payout control process is terminated.

  In the winning ball subtraction process, first, in step S2108, the value in the winning ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 is decremented by 1, and in the subsequent step S2109, the value of the payout number counter area 376 in the RAM 333 is decremented by 1. Thereafter, in step S2110, it is determined whether or not the value in the prize ball number storage area 374 is “2” or less. If it is not “2” or less, the payout control process is terminated as it is. If it is “2” or less, it is determined in step S2111 whether or not the prize ball low speed flag is stored in the prize ball low speed flag storage area of the RAM 333. If the prize ball low speed flag is stored, the payout control process is terminated as it is. If the prize ball low speed flag is not stored, the prize ball low speed flag is stored in the prize ball low speed flag storage area in step S2112. After that, the payout control process is terminated.

  Further, in the rent rental subtraction process, first, in step S2113, 1 is subtracted from the value in the rented number storage area 375 of the RAM 333, and then in step S2114, 1 is subtracted from the value in the payout number counter area 376 in the RAM 333. Then, the payout control process ends.

<Prize ball permission signal setting processing>
Next, the winning ball permission signal setting process in step S1409 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning ball permission signal setting process, a process of stopping and starting the output of the winning ball permission signal from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 is executed.

  In the winning ball permission signal setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 is three or less, which is the permission reference number. If the number is four or more, after setting the prize ball non-permission state (output non-permission state) in step S2407, the award ball permission signal setting process is terminated.

  Specifically, the setting of the winning ball disapproval state is performed in the winning ball permission state flag storage area (the winning ball permission information storage unit or the output permission information storage unit) of the RAM 333. Information) is stored, the prize ball permission state flag is deleted, and the output of the prize ball permission signal is stopped (output of the prize ball permission signal from the output means for outputting the prize ball permission signal) Stop). In a state where the winning ball permission state flag is erased, the output of the winning ball permission signal from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 is stopped and the state is maintained.

  In this pachinko machine 10, since the state in which the prize ball permission signal is output is the output state of the HI level signal, the state in which the output of the prize ball permission signal is stopped is the output state of the LOW level signal. . However, when the state where the prize ball permission signal is output is the output state of the LOW level signal, the state where the output of the prize ball permission signal is stopped may be the output state of the HI level signal. Furthermore, the state where the output of the winning ball permission signal is stopped may be a state where no signal is output for the signal path.

  On the other hand, if the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 is three or less, which is the permitted reference number, in step S2401, whether or not the ball removal operation is being performed in step S2402. Determine. If the ball removal operation is not in progress, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not there is a payout error state.

  If it is in the payout error state, after setting the prize ball non-permission state in step S2407, the prize ball permission signal setting process is terminated. In this way, by setting the prize ball non-permission state in the payout error state, in the payout error state, the output of the prize ball permission signal is stopped and the output of the prize ball command is prohibited.

  As already explained, in the payout error state, payout of the game ball is stopped. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the power supply from the external power supply is stopped, the information stored in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is deleted. Therefore, when a prize ball command is output in the payout error state, if the power supply is stopped while the payout error state continues, the prize ball corresponding to the prize ball command is erased without being paid out. . That is, in a configuration in which a prize ball command is output in a payout error state, there is a high possibility that a prize ball corresponding to the prize ball command is erased without being paid out. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, such inconvenience can be prevented.

  If it is determined in step S2403 that there is no payout error state, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not the full tank low speed flag is stored in the full tank low speed flag storage area of the RAM 333. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the ball no low speed flag is stored in the ball no low speed flag storage area of the RAM 333.

  If either the full tank low speed flag or the ball no low speed flag is stored, after setting the prize ball non-permission state in step S2407, the prize ball permission signal setting process is terminated. In this way, when the full tank low speed state or the ball no low speed state is set, the prize ball disallowed state is set. Output is prohibited.

  As already described, the full tank low speed state or the ball no low speed state is a state that is set as a preceding stage when there is a high possibility of a payout error state thereafter. Then, in the payout error state, payout of the game ball is stopped. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the power supply from the external power supply is stopped, the information stored in the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is deleted. Therefore, when a prize ball command is output in the payout error state, if the power supply is stopped while the payout error state continues, the prize ball corresponding to the prize ball command is erased without being paid out. . That is, in a configuration in which a prize ball command is output in a payout error state, there is a high possibility that a prize ball corresponding to the prize ball command is erased without being paid out. On the other hand, as in this configuration, when it is determined that there is a high possibility of a payout error state, the payout error state is disabled by stopping the output of the prize ball permission signal and prohibiting the output of the prize ball command It is possible to prohibit the output of the prize ball command before it becomes, and the possibility of the occurrence of the above inconvenience is drastically reduced.

  If the full tank low speed flag is not stored in step S2404, and if the ball no low speed flag is not stored in step S2405, a prize ball permission state (output permission state) is set in step S2406. Later, the winning ball permission signal setting process is terminated. Even when the ball removal operation is being performed in step S2403, after setting the winning ball permission state in step S2406, the present winning ball permission signal setting process is terminated.

  Specifically, for setting the winning ball permission state, when the winning ball permission state flag is not stored in the winning ball permission state flag storage area of the RAM 333, the winning ball permission state flag is stored, and the winning ball permission signal is output. (The output of the prize ball permission signal from the output means for outputting the prize ball permission signal is started). In the state where the prize ball permission state flag is stored, the output of the prize ball permission signal from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 is started, and this state is maintained. That is, in a state where the ball removal operation is not being performed, the information on the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 is three or less, which is the permitted reference number, and further, a payout error state, a full tank low speed When the state and the ball no low speed state are not established, the output of the prize ball permission signal is continued.

<About the output of the prize ball command in response to the prize ball permission signal>
Next, the manner in which a prize ball command is output in response to a prize ball permission signal will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. In the following description using the time chart, the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 is referred to as the main CPU 311, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is referred to as the payout CPU 331. The RAM 313 of the main control board 301 is referred to as a main side RAM 313, and the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 is referred to as a payout side RAM 333. In the explanation using FIG. 47, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that only a winning corresponding to four prize balls among a plurality of kinds of winnings is generated.

  First, a case where a single winning occurs will be described.

  In a situation where a winning ball permission signal has already been output from the payout side CPU 331 to the main side CPU 311, when a winning occurs at the timing t <b> 1, four winning ball commands are output from the main side CPU 311 to the payout side CPU 331. As a result, the information on the number of the four winning balls is stored in the payout side RAM 333, and the output of the winning ball permission signal is stopped when the permitted reference number is exceeded (the non-permitted reference number is reached). Payment is started.

  Thereafter, by paying out one game ball at the timing of t2, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes three of the permitted reference number. Thereby, the output of the prize ball permission signal is started. Thereafter, the payout of one game ball is further executed at the timing of t3, so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes two of the switching reference numbers. As a result, the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is switched from the normal cycle to the low speed cycle. Thereafter, by paying out two game balls by the timing of t4, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes zero. As a result, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 257 is stopped, and the payout of the prize ball is ended.

  Next, a case will be described in which a win is generated again in a situation where the payout speed of the payout motor 257 has a low speed cycle after a single win has occurred.

  In a situation where a winning ball permission signal has already been output from the payout side CPU 331 to the main side CPU 311, when a winning occurs at the timing t5, four winning ball commands are output from the main side CPU 311 to the payout side CPU 331. As a result, information on the number of four winning balls is stored in the paying-out RAM 333, and when the permitted reference number is exceeded, the output of the winning ball permission signal is stopped and the payout of the game ball is started.

  Thereafter, by paying out one game ball at the timing of t6, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes three of the permitted reference number. Thereby, the output of the prize ball permission signal is started. Thereafter, the payout of one game ball is further executed at the timing of t7, whereby the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes two of the switching reference numbers. As a result, the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is switched from the normal cycle to the low speed cycle.

  Thereafter, when a new winning is generated at timing t8 within which the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 is not zero, four prize balls are given from the main CPU 311 to the payout CPU 331. The command is output. As a result, information on the number of four prize balls is stored in the payout side RAM 333 and the output of the prize ball permission signal is stopped when the permitted reference number is exceeded, and the payout motor 257 is paid out when the switching reference number is exceeded. The speed is restored from the low speed cycle to the normal cycle.

  Next, a case where winnings occur continuously will be described.

  As described above, when a new winning is generated at the timing of t8, four winning ball commands are output from the main CPU 311 to the payout CPU 331. As a result, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes five by adding a new prize ball number to the number of prize balls stored so far.

  Thereafter, by paying out two game balls by the timing of t9, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes three of the permitted reference number. Thereby, the output of the prize ball permission signal is started. In this case, winnings are continuously generated until the timing t9, and a plurality of pieces of information on four prize balls are stored in the main RAM 313. Thereafter, four prize ball commands are output from the main CPU 311 to the payout CPU 331 at a timing t10 which is a timing before the new game ball is paid out. In addition, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout-side RAM 333 at the timing of t11 becomes the permission reference number, and output of the prize ball permission signal is started. Thereafter, four prize ball commands are output from the main CPU 311 to the payout CPU 331 at a timing t12, which is a timing before a new game ball is paid out.

  That is, in a situation where the prize ball information is already stored in the main RAM 313, when the prize ball information stored in the payout RAM 333 becomes the permission reference number and the output of the prize ball permission signal is started, A prize ball command is output from the main CPU 311 to the payout CPU 331 at a timing before a new game ball is paid out, and the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout RAM 333 exceeds the permitted reference number. Become.

  This is due to the following reason. The payout speed in the normal cycle of the payout motor 257 is set so that one game ball is paid out at intervals of 60 msec. On the other hand, in the payout side CPU 331, the time required for the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 to become the permission reference number and the start of outputting the prize ball permission signal is the execution time of the timer interrupt process. It is in the range of 2 msec which is in the range of. Further, the time required for the main CPU 311 to output a prize ball command specified as being permitted to output the prize ball command based on the input of the prize ball permission signal is in the range of 20 msec to 24 msec. . Also, the time required for the payout side CPU 331 to input a prize ball command from the main side CPU 311 and add information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command to the payout side RAM 333 is the execution time of the timer interrupt process. It is in the range of 2 msec which is in the range of. In addition, even if the time required for transmission of the prize ball permission signal and the prize ball command, the error in processing time, etc. are included, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes the permission reference number. The time required for the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout-side RAM 333 to exceed the permitted reference number by inputting a prize ball command is about 40 msec at the maximum. This is shorter than 60 msec which is the time required for paying out one game ball. That is, when the output of the winning ball permission signal is started in the situation where the winning ball information is already stored in the main RAM 313, the winning ball command is output at the timing before the new game ball is paid out. The processing time relating to prize balls in the main CPU 311 and the payout CPU 331 is set so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout RAM 333 exceeds the permitted reference number.

  In the configuration as described above, the permission reference number that triggers the output of the prize ball permission signal from the payout side CPU 331 to the main side CPU 311 is an opportunity to switch the payout speed of the payout motor 257 from the normal cycle to the low speed cycle. One game ball is set more than the switching reference number. Thereby, in a situation where a plurality of prize ball information is stored in the main side RAM 313, the prizes stored in the payout side RAM 333 until all the output of each prize ball command corresponding to the prize ball information are executed. The information on the number of balls does not reach the switching reference number. Therefore, a prize ball permission signal is output from the payout side CPU 331 to the main side CPU 311, and only one prize ball command corresponding to one win is output from the main side CPU 311 to the payout side CPU 331. In the configuration, it is possible to prevent the payout speed of the payout motor 257 from being switched from the normal cycle to the low speed cycle in spite of the prize ball information being stored in the main side RAM 313, so that the game ball can be paid out smoothly. Can be done.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 47, thereafter, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout-side RAM 333 at the timing of t13 becomes the reference number of authorizations, and the output of the prize ball permission signal is started. Further, when one game ball is paid out further at the timing of t14, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 333 becomes two of the switching reference number, and the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is increased. The normal cycle is switched from the normal cycle until then. Thereafter, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout-side RAM 333 at time t15 becomes zero, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 257 is stopped, and the payout of prize balls is completed.

<Discharge monitoring process and initialization process>
Next, the payout monitoring process in step S2105 and the initialization process in step S2106 of the payout control process will be described. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the payout monitoring process will be described after first explaining the initialization process.

  Here, in the following description, the abnormality detection state means that the CPU 331 exceeds the specific timing at which the payout of the game ball should be specified even though the rotating body 256 of the payout device 224 is executing the payout operation. This is a state that is set at a timing before the timing at which the retry state is set when a special situation in which the identification is not performed occurs. Then, the number of times that the abnormality detection state is identified is counted using the detection abnormality counter area 379 of the RAM 333.

  The initialization process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The initialization process is a process that is executed after the CPU 331 specifies the payout of one game ball in the payout control process (FIG. 43) as described above.

  In the initialization process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the value in the drive counter area 378 of the RAM 333 is less than “60” as the detection abnormality reference value (second control count). When the value of the drive counter area 378 is “60” or more, the process proceeds to step S2503 without executing the process of step S2502. If it is less than “60”, the detection abnormality counter area 379 of the RAM 333 is initialized in step S2502, that is, “0” is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S2503.

  In step S2503, the drive counter area 378 is initialized, specifically, “0” is cleared. That is, when the CPU 331 specifies the payout of game balls, the drive counter area 378 is initialized. In subsequent step S2504, the abnormality detection state is released and the retry state is released. That is, when the CPU 331 specifies a game ball payout, the abnormality detection state and the retry state are canceled. The abnormality detection state is set by storing the abnormality detection state flag in the abnormality detection state flag storage area of the RAM 333, and the abnormality detection state is canceled by deleting the abnormality detection state flag. Thereafter, the initialization process ends.

  Next, the payout monitoring process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, in the payout monitoring process, an abnormality detection state and a retry state are set, and a payout device abnormal state is set. The dispensing device abnormal state is a state set when it is specified that the dispensing device 224 is not normal. The abnormal state of the payout device may be set based on a retry state, and may be set based on an abnormal detection state even if the retry state is not reached.

  In the payout monitoring process, it is determined in step S2601 whether or not the payout apparatus is in an abnormal state. Note that the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is performed by storing the dispensing device abnormal state flag in the dispensing device abnormal state flag storage area of the RAM 333, and the cancellation of the dispensing device abnormal state is to delete the dispensing device abnormal state flag. Is done. Also, the determination as to whether or not the payout device is in an abnormal state is made by determining whether or not the payout device abnormal state flag is stored in the payout device abnormal state flag storage area of the RAM 333.

  If it is not in the dispensing device abnormal state, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not it is in a retry state. If not in the retry state, it is determined in step S2603 whether or not the value in the drive counter area 378 is equal to or greater than “120” as the retry reference value (first control count).

  If the value in the drive counter area 378 is not “120” or more, it is determined in step S2604 whether an abnormality is detected. Note that the determination as to whether or not the abnormality detection state is present is made by determining whether or not an abnormality detection state flag is stored.

  If it is in the abnormality detection state, the payout monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if it is not in the abnormality detection state, it is determined in step S2605 whether the value of the drive counter area 378 is equal to or greater than “60” as the detection abnormality reference value. judge. If it is not “60” or more, the payout monitoring process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is “60” or more, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In step S2606, an abnormality detection state is set. Further, the information in the detection abnormality counter area 379 of the RAM 333 is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379. Here, as described above, the value of the drive counter area 378 is incremented by 1 when a drive signal of 1 pulse is output from the CPU 331 to the motor driver 334 in the drive signal output process (FIG. 45). The CPU 331 is initialized when a game ball payout is specified. Further, the rotating body 256 of the payout device 224 advances one step by outputting a driving signal of one pulse from the CPU 331 to the motor driver 334, and makes one rotation by moving 60 steps in the same direction. When the rotating body 256 makes one rotation, if the payout device 224 is normal, at least one (specifically, two) game balls are surely paid out. In such a situation, the case where the value of the drive counter area 378 is “60” or more means that the game ball is not paid out normally. In this situation, the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is set to the value. By adding 1, it is possible for the CPU 331 to specify the number of times that the abnormality detection state has been set.

  In addition, the abnormality detection state is set in step S2606, and when the abnormality detection state is specified in step S2604, the processing in step S2605 and subsequent steps is not performed, so that the value of the drive counter area 378 is “60”. In the situation where the value is not initialized, the information in the detection abnormality counter area 379 is prevented from being repeatedly updated. In other words, even when the rotating body 256 of the payout device 224 executes the payout operation, a situation occurs in which the CPU 331 does not specify the game ball after the timing at which the payout of the game ball should be specified. Therefore, the information in the detection abnormality counter area 379 is updated only once, and the number of times that the abnormality detection state is set is specified accurately.

  In a succeeding step S2607, it is determined whether or not the value of the detected abnormality counter area 379 is “2” or more as the abnormality reference value (abnormal reference number) (determines whether the abnormality reference number has been reached). Here, as already described, in the initialization process (FIG. 48) executed after the CPU 331 specifies the payout of one game ball, when the value of the drive counter area 378 is less than “60”, That is, when the CPU 331 specifies the payout of one game ball in a state where the abnormality detection state is not set, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized, and the value of the drive counter area 378 is “ When it is 60 ”or more, initialization of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is not executed. Therefore, the case where the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is “2” or more means that the situation in which the specification is not performed beyond the timing at which the payout of the game ball should be specified in the CPU 331 has occurred continuously. means.

  If the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is not “2” or more, the payout monitoring process is terminated as it is. If the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is “2” or more, the payout monitoring process is terminated after executing the process of step S2608. In step S2608, setting of the dispensing device abnormal state, first abnormality notification start processing, and cancellation of the abnormality detection state are executed.

  By setting the payout device abnormal state, in the payout state setting process (FIG. 44), the state of the payout motor 257 is set to the stop state, assuming that it is a payout error state. Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped. Also, in the prize ball permission signal setting process (FIG. 46), a prize ball non-permission state is set assuming that the payout error state is present, and the output of the prize ball permission signal to the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 is stopped. .

  In the first abnormality notification start process, the CPU 331 controls the emission of the payout display lamp unit 27 so that the payout display lamp unit 27 blinks in response to the first abnormality notification. In addition, the aspect of 1st abnormality notification is not limited to said thing, For example, it is good also as a structure which outputs an abnormal signal to the main control board 301 from CPU331. In this case, an error command is output from the main control board 301 to the sound lamp control board 324, the error display lamp section 24 is turned on, the notification sound is output from the speaker section 26, and the display screen of the symbol display device 91 is displayed. A notification display or the like may be performed. Further, an error command is directly output from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 to the sound lamp control board 324, the error display lamp section 24 is turned on, the notification sound is output from the speaker section 26, and the symbol display device 91 You may make it perform the alerting | reporting display etc. on a display screen. Further, an abnormality signal may be output to the management computer (hall computer) of the game hall through the external terminal board 213 directly from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 or via the main control board 301. Further, all of the above aspects may be executed, or only a part of the above aspects may be executed. The first abnormality notification is continuously or intermittently continued until a process of step S2613 described later is executed.

  Even if the value of the drive counter area 378 becomes “60” or more, the state where the payout of the game ball is not specified in the CPU 331 is continued, and when the value of the drive counter area 378 becomes “120” or more, step S2603 After affirmative determination is made in step S2609 and the processing in step S2609 is executed, the payout monitoring processing is terminated. In step S2609, the retry state is set and the abnormality detection state is canceled.

  Here, as described above, the value of the drive counter area 378 is incremented by 1 when a drive signal of 1 pulse is output from the CPU 331 to the motor driver 334 in the drive signal output process (FIG. 45). The CPU 331 is initialized when a game ball payout is specified. Further, the rotating body 256 of the payout device 224 advances one step by outputting a driving signal of one pulse from the CPU 331 to the motor driver 334, and makes one rotation by moving 60 steps in the same direction. When the rotating body 256 makes one rotation, if the payout device 224 is normal, at least one game ball is surely paid out. Under such circumstances, when the value of the drive counter area 378 is “120” or more, the game ball is not paid out normally even though the rotating body 256 is rotated twice in the forward direction. Means that.

  As a cause of the case where the game ball is not paid out normally, there is a case where a ball of the game ball is clogged between the rotary body 256 of the payout device 224 and the housing 251 of the payout device 224, or the rotary body 256. It is conceivable that the game ball slides with respect to the peripheral surface, and the game ball does not enter the recess 256a of the rotating body 256. Therefore, when the value of the drive counter area 378 is “120” or more, the above state can be resolved by setting the retry state. The retry operation of the rotating body 256 is as described above.

  If the retry state is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, and the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, it is determined whether the value in drive counter area 378 is greater than or equal to the stop reference value. Specifically, the value of the drive counter area 378 is added to the drive counter area 378 by “120” that is a value when the retry state is set and then the retry operation described above is performed thereafter. It is determined whether or not the sum with the value has been reached.

  If the value in the drive counter area 378 is not equal to or greater than the stop reference value, the payout monitoring process is terminated as it is. If the value in the drive counter area 378 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value, the payout monitoring process is terminated after executing the process of step S2611. In step S2611, the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state, the start processing of the second abnormality notification, and the release of the retry state are executed.

  The effect of the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is the same as that described in step S2608. Further, in the start processing of the second abnormality notification, the CPU 331 performs the blinking corresponding to the second abnormality notification in the payout display lamp unit 27, that is, in a manner different from the case of the first abnormality notification. The payout display lamp unit 27 is controlled to emit light. The second abnormality notification mode is not limited to the first abnormality notification mode, and may be the same as the first abnormality notification mode. Moreover, the aspect of 2nd abnormality alerting | reporting is good also as the other aspect illustrated as an aspect of 1st abnormality alerting | reporting.

  If a dispensing device abnormal state is set in step S2608 or step S2611, an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, and the flow proceeds to step S2612. In step S2612, it is determined whether an abnormality canceling operation has been performed. Here, the abnormality canceling operation means that the state return switch 245 having a function as an abnormality canceling operation unit in the payout control device 242 is operated.

  The abnormality canceling operation is not limited to the above, and for example, a dedicated abnormality canceling operation unit or the RAM erasing switch 247 may be operated. In addition, at the time of the abnormality canceling operation, at least information regarding payout of the game ball stored in the RAM 333 may be deleted. Also, different abnormality canceling operations are performed for the dispensing device abnormal state set based on the detection abnormality counter area 379 becoming “2” or more and the dispensing device abnormal state set after the retry state is entered. It may be configured as required.

  If the abnormality canceling operation has not been performed, the payout monitoring process is terminated as it is. If an abnormality canceling operation has been performed, the payout monitoring process ends after executing the process of step S2613. In step S2613, cancellation processing of the dispensing device abnormal state, abnormality notification (both first abnormality notification and second abnormality notification) termination processing, and various initialization processes are executed. In the various initialization processes, at least initialization of the drive counter area 378 and the detection abnormality counter area 379 is executed.

<About the state of monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the dispensing device 224>
Next, how to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. In the following description, a case will be described where game balls are paid out based on the addition of prize ball number information to the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The same applies to the case where game balls are paid out based on the addition of information on the number of rented balls to the storage area 375. Further, the case where the payout motor 257 is maintained in the normal cycle will be described. However, even if the payout motor 257 is changed to the low speed cycle or maintained in the low speed cycle, only the time between the timings is increased. The aspect of is the same.

  In FIG. 50, the line L1 is a line indicating the value of the drive counter area 378 when the abnormality detection state is set, and the line L2 is the line of the drive counter area 378 when the retry state is set. The line L3 is a line indicating the value of the drive counter area 378 when the dispensing device abnormal state is set after the retry state is set.

  First, a case where a retry state is entered after entering the abnormality detection state will be described.

  The payout operation of the payout motor 257 (that is, the rotating body 256) is started by adding the prize ball number to the prize ball number storage area 374 at the timing of t1. In addition, when the payout motor 257 performs a payout operation, a drive signal is output from the CPU 331, so the value in the drive counter area 378 is added as appropriate (updated as appropriate).

  Thereafter, at time t2, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized. However, since the information on the number of prize balls for one game ball or more is still stored in the prize ball number storage area 374, the payout operation of the payout motor 257 is continued, and accordingly the drive counter after the timing of t2. The value of area 378 is added as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 at the timing t3, the abnormality detection state is set and the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is incremented by one. Thereafter, when the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L2 at the timing of t4, the abnormality detection state is canceled, and a retry state is set instead.

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at a timing t5 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L3. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized and the retry state is released. However, at this timing, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is maintained without being initialized. That is, even if the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at the timing before the payout device abnormal state is set after the retry state is set, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is not initialized. .

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at the timing t6 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized, and the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized. As a case where the above situation occurs, for example, there is a case where a ball clogging or the like occurs in the dispensing device 224, and this is resolved by a retry operation.

  Next, the case where the dispensing device is in an abnormal state after the retry state is described.

  As described above, the drive counter area 378 is initialized at the timing t6. However, since the information on the number of prize balls for one game ball or more is still stored in the prize ball number storage area 374, the payout motor 257 is stored. The payout operation is continued, and accordingly, the value of the drive counter area 378 is appropriately added after the timing t6.

  Thereafter, the abnormality detection state is set at timing t7, the value in the detection abnormality counter area 379 is incremented by 1, and the abnormality detection state is canceled and the retry state is set at timing t8. Thereafter, when the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L3 at the timing of t9, the retry state is released, and instead, the dispenser abnormal state is set.

  When the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is performed, the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped, and the stopped state is maintained until the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is canceled. Further, the abnormality notification is started and the abnormality notification is continued until the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is canceled. Thereafter, although not shown in the drawings, when an abnormality canceling operation is performed, the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is canceled, the state where the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped is canceled, and the abnormality notification is terminated. . Further, the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized.

  Next, a case where the dispensing apparatus is in an abnormal state without entering a retry state will be described.

  The payout operation of the payout motor 257 is started by adding information on the number of prize balls to the prize ball number storage area 374 at the timing of t11. In addition, when the payout motor 257 performs a payout operation, a drive signal is output from the CPU 331, so that the value in the drive counter area 378 is added as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 at the timing of t12, the abnormality detection state is set and the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at a timing t13 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L2. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized and the abnormality detection state is released. However, at this timing, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is maintained without being initialized. That is, even if the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at the timing before the retry state is set after entering the abnormality detection state, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is not initialized.

  Thereafter, when the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 again at the timing of t14, the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is incremented by 1 and the value becomes “2”. The device abnormal state is set. When this dispensing device abnormal state is set, the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped as described above, and the stopped state is maintained. Moreover, abnormality notification is started and the abnormality notification is continued. Thereafter, an abnormality canceling operation is performed at timing t15, so that the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is canceled, the state where the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped is canceled, and the abnormality notification is terminated. Also, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the payout operation of the rotating body 256 is performed or in a situation where it is performed, the game ball is not normally detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258. An illegal act is assumed in which more game balls are paid out than the number corresponding to the information stored in the payout number counter area 376 (or the prize ball number storage area 374 or the rented number storage area 375).

  Specifically, for example, a fraudulent jig is disposed at the position of the dispensing ball detection sensor 258 from the lower plate 34 side or the like. The fraud jig can generate a magnetic field. For example, by generating a magnetic field corresponding to the game ball remaining on the detection unit 258a from the fraud jig, the detection unit 258a is caused to play the game ball. If the game ball stays in the detection unit 258a even though the ball passes, the payout ball detection sensor 258 erroneously detects. In addition, for example, by generating a magnetic field corresponding to the fact that the game ball does not pass through the detection unit 258a from the fraudulent jig, the detection unit 258a is played even though the game ball passes through the detection unit 258a. If the ball does not pass, the payout ball detection sensor 258 will erroneously detect.

  Since the CPU 331 is configured to identify that one game ball has been paid out based on confirming a change in the detection signal at the timing when the detection of the game ball is started by the payout ball detection sensor 258, the payout ball detection is performed. If the detection state of the sensor 258 is set as described above by the fraudulent jig, the CPU 331 passes the large number of game balls in spite of the large number of game balls actually passing through the detection unit 258a. It cannot be grasped and there is a concern that the payout operation of the rotating body 256 is continued, and if this is continued, this state may be continued until a retry operation or a subsequent payout device abnormal state is executed. Concerned. In this case, in a configuration in which the period until the retry operation is executed is set to be long, a large number of game balls have been paid out by then.

  Further, as a fraudulent jig, there is one that can be set to be switched between an operation state in which the game ball is not accurately detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258 and a non-operation state in which the detection is accurately performed. It is assumed that it will be used. In this case, the retry operation or the like is not executed by switching the fraudulent jig from the operation state to the non-operation state at the timing before the retry operation or the like is executed. Then, at the timing when the fraudulent jig is switched from the operating state to the non-operating state, the CPU 331 can specify the payout of one game ball, but the payout ball detection until just before the retry operation is executed. The act of causing the sensor 258 to not normally detect the game ball is repeated for the number corresponding to the information stored in the payout number counter area 376.

  On the other hand, in a situation where the payout motor 257 is driven and controlled so as to perform the payout operation, the payout ball detection sensor 258 is set at a specific timing that is earlier than the timing at which the retry operation is performed. When a special situation has occurred in which the detection result does not become the specific detection result corresponding to the game ball being paid out, the CPU 331 specifies it. And based on having specified in this way, while setting up the abnormal state of a payout device and stopping payout of a game ball, the 1st abnormality notice was performed. As a result, even if an illegal act is attempted to receive a large number of gaming balls using a fraudulent jig, it is possible to prevent a large number of gaming balls from being received and The manager of the game hall can be encouraged to deal with the act.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that a special situation has occurred, a configuration in which an abnormal state of the dispensing apparatus is immediately set can be considered. There is a concern that the dispensing device abnormal state may be set at a timing before being performed. That is, when a failure occurs in the payout motor 257 or the payout ball detection sensor 258 or when a ball is clogged around the rotating body 256, a special situation occurs in the process until the retry operation is started. In a configuration in which, when it is determined that a special situation has occurred, the dispensing device abnormal state is immediately set, etc., the timing before the retry operation is executed in a situation where the above fraudulent act is not performed. Thus, there is a high possibility that the abnormal state of the dispensing device will be set. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed, it is considered that the above-mentioned fraudulent act is continuously performed in an attempt to illegally pay out a large number of game balls. On the other hand, when the special situation occurs continuously without interposing a situation in which the detection result of the dispensing ball detection sensor 258 becomes the specific detection result without becoming the special situation, the dispensing device abnormal state And the first abnormality notification are performed, so that the dispensing device abnormal state is set at a timing before the retry operation is executed in a situation where the above fraud is not performed. It is possible to deal with the above fraudulent activities while suppressing the occurrence of the above.

  In particular, it is considered that the situation in which the game ball does not enter the recess 256a of the sliding rotator 256 with respect to the peripheral surface of the rotator 256 is difficult to occur immediately after the situation is once resolved. On the other hand, it is considered that the above fraudulent acts are performed continuously. On the other hand, when the special situation is continuously generated as described above, by setting the dispensing device abnormal state, etc., it is a situation where the fraud is not performed and the retry operation is executed. In addition, it is possible to cope with the fraudulent act while suppressing the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state at the previous timing.

  In the configuration in which the timing for starting the retry operation is specified using the drive counter area 378 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322, the timing for specifying that a special situation has occurred is measured using the drive counter area 378. I did it. Thereby, the above-described excellent effect can be obtained while suppressing the complexity of the software configuration and the hardware configuration.

  In addition, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 changes the payout speed of the game ball by the rotating body 256 as necessary. In this case, the CPU 331 changes the payout speed of the game ball by the rotating body 256 by adjusting the output cycle of the drive signal to the payout motor 257, and each time the drive signal is output from the CPU 331, the CPU 331 The value is updated. In this case, by using the drive counter area 378 to measure the timing for specifying that a special situation has occurred, the fact that the special situation has occurred can be identified using the same software configuration and hardware configuration. It can be performed corresponding to each payout speed.

  In addition, in a situation where the payout motor 257 is driven and controlled so as to perform a payout operation, the detection result of the payout ball detection sensor 258 corresponds to the fact that the game ball has been paid out at a specific timing. By specifying a special situation that does not result in a specific detection result, it is possible to deal with the fraud even if a tool for maintaining the payout ball detection sensor 258 at a LOW level signal is used as a fraudulent tool. Even if a tool for maintaining the dispensing ball detection sensor 258 at the HI level signal is used as a fraudulent jig, the fraudulent act can be dealt with.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 is different from that in the first embodiment. This different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As in the first embodiment, the payout control board 322 is electrically connected to the main control board 301 and the payout device 224, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 receives a command input from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301. The payout device 224 is driven and controlled based on the above. Further, the payout control board 322 is electrically connected to the payout display lamp unit 27, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 controls the payout display lamp part 27 to emit light.

  In the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322, the same areas as those in the first embodiment are set, such as a payout number counter area 376, a drive counter area 378, a payout specifying counter area 380, and the like. Further, the RAM 333 in the present embodiment is provided with a detection abnormality counter area as in the first embodiment, but the detection abnormality counter area is different from the first embodiment in that the first abnormality is the first. A detection abnormality counter area 391 and a second detection abnormality counter area 392 are set. In the RAM 333 in the present embodiment, a first timer counter area 393 and a second timer counter area 394 are set separately.

  The first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are both composed of 1 byte, similarly to the detection abnormality counter area 379 in the first embodiment, and in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. It is used to identify an abnormality in the dispensing device 224. The first timer counter area 393 and the second timer counter area 394 are both composed of 1 byte, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is the initial of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392. It is used to specify the timing for executing the conversion.

  Note that each detection abnormality counter area 391, 392 and each timer counter area 393, 394 are not limited to 1 byte, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 performs processing using each counter area 391-394 well. If so, it may be less than 1 byte, that is, less than 8 bits, or 2 bytes or more.

  Next, payout control processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The payout control process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) of the CPU 331, as in the first embodiment.

  In the payout control process, first, a timer update process is executed in step S2701. In the timer update process, an update process for the first timer counter area 393 and the second timer counter area 394 is executed. This will be described later.

  Thereafter, a payout state setting process is executed in step S2702, a drive signal output process is executed in step S2703, and a ball detection process is executed in step S2704. The processes in steps S2702 to S2704 are the same as the processes in steps S2101 to S2103 of the payout control process (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S2705, it is determined whether or not the processing result of the ball detection processing is a processing result indicating that the game ball has been paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a payout identification flag is stored in the RAM 333. If the payout identification flag is not stored, the payout monitoring process is executed in step S2706, and then the payout control process is terminated. In the payout monitoring process, a process for determining whether or not the payout device 224 is normal is executed as in the first embodiment, but the specific processing contents are different from those in the first embodiment. Yes. Details of the payout monitoring process will be described later.

  If the payout identification flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2707, where the drive counter area 378 of the RAM 333 is initialized, and the abnormality detection state is released and the retry state is released in step S2708. Then, each process of step S2709-step S2716 is performed. Each process of step S2709 to step S2716 is the same as each process of step S2107 to step S2114 of the payout control process (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment.

  Next, the timer update process of step S2701 in the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the timer update process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is an initial value. Similar to the detection abnormality counter area 379 in the first embodiment, the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is updated from the initial value based on the setting of the abnormality detection state in the payout monitoring process. If the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is the initial value, the process proceeds to step S2805 as it is.

  If the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is not the initial value, update processing of the first timer counter area 393 is executed in step S2802. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the first timer counter area 393.

  Thereafter, in step S2803, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area 393 has reached the first initialization reference value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area 393 is “1000” or more. Here, the payout control process (FIG. 52) having the timer update process as a part of the process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) activated at a cycle of 2 msec. It is executed every time the process is started. Therefore, the timer update process is also started at a cycle of about 2 msec, and if the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is not the initial value, the process of step S2802, that is, the process of adding 1 to the value of the first timer counter area 393 is about 2 msec. It is executed in a cycle. Therefore, in step S2803, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area 393 is “1000” or more, so that about the reference reference period for determination after the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is updated from the initial value. It is determined whether 2 seconds have passed.

  If the value of the first timer counter area 393 is less than “1000”, the process proceeds directly to step S2805. When the value of the first timer counter area 393 is “1000” or more, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S 2804, the first timer counter area 393 is initialized, that is, “0” is cleared, and the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is initialized, that is, “0” is cleared. That is, the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is initialized after about 2 seconds have elapsed since the update from the initial value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2805.

  In step 2805, it is determined whether or not the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is an initial value. Similar to the first detection abnormality counter area 391, the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is updated from the initial value based on the setting of the abnormality detection state in the payout monitoring process. If the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is the initial value, the timer update process is terminated as it is.

  If the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is not the initial value, update processing of the second timer counter area 394 is executed in step S2806. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the second timer counter area 394.

  Thereafter, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area 394 has reached the second initialization reference value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area 394 is “1000” or more. By determining whether or not the value of the second timer counter area 394 is “1000” or more, as with the first timer counter area 393, about 2 sec after the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is updated from the initial value. It is determined whether or not it has passed.

  When the value of the second timer counter area 394 is less than “1000”, the timer update process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer counter area 394 is “1000” or more, the process proceeds to step S2808. In step S2808, the second timer counter area 394 is initialized, that is, “0” is cleared, and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is initialized, that is, “0” is cleared. That is, the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is initialized after approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the update from the initial value. Thereafter, the timer update process is terminated.

  Next, the payout monitoring process of step S2706 in the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the payout monitoring process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the payout apparatus is in an abnormal state, and in step S2902, it is determined whether or not it is a retry state. In step S2903, the value in the drive counter area 378 of the RAM 333 is “120”. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is detected. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not the value of the drive counter area 378 is "60" or more. The processes in steps S2901 to S2905 are the same as the processes in steps S2601 to S2605 of the payout monitoring process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S2905 that the value of the drive counter area 378 is “60” or more, detection abnormality counter update processing is executed in step S2906. Here, the detection abnormality counter update processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the detection abnormality counter update process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not both the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are initial values. If both are initial values, in step S3002, the update processing of the first detection abnormality counter area 391, specifically, the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is incremented by 1, and then this detection abnormality counter update is performed. The process ends.

  When one of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is not the initial value, the update processing of the first detection abnormality counter area 391, specifically, the first detection is performed in step S3003. Add 1 to the value of the abnormality counter area 391. In the subsequent step S300, the updating process of the second detection abnormality counter area 392, specifically, the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is incremented by one. Thereafter, the detection abnormality counter update process is terminated.

  Returning to the explanation of the payout monitoring process (FIG. 54), after the detection abnormality counter update process is executed in step S2906, the abnormality detection state is set in step S2907. In the subsequent step S2908, the value of one of the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 out of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is “3” or more as the abnormality reference value (abnormal reference number). It is determined whether or not. If both of the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are not “3” or more, the payout monitoring process is terminated as it is. If any one of the detected abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 is “3” or more, the payout monitoring process is terminated after executing the process of step S2909. In step S2909, setting of the dispensing device abnormal state, first abnormality notification start processing, and cancellation of the abnormality detection state are executed.

  Here, the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are initialized after about 2 seconds have elapsed since the abnormality was detected and the update from the initial value was performed. In addition, when the values of the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are “3” or more, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. That is, when the abnormality detection state is set three times within about 2 seconds, the dispensing device abnormal state is set.

  Further, when the abnormality detection state is set in a situation where both the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are initial values, the update of only the first detection abnormality counter area 391 has priority. When the abnormality detection state is set in a situation where at least one of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is not the initial value, the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the first detection abnormality counter area 391 Both of the 2-detection abnormality counter area 392 are updated. Therefore, when the abnormality detection state is set a plurality of times, the update of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the update of the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are started from the setting of the abnormality detection state at different timings. Is started. Specifically, in the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392, the timing of setting the abnormality detection state that is the starting point of the update start is shifted by one time.

  Next, how to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. In the following description, a case will be described where game balls are paid out based on the addition of prize ball number information to the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The same applies to the case where game balls are paid out based on the addition of information on the number of rented balls to the storage area 375.

  In FIG. 56, the line L1 is a line indicating the value of the drive counter area 378 when the abnormality detection state is set, and the line L2 is the line of the drive counter area 378 when the retry state is set. The line L3 is a line indicating the value of the drive counter area 378 when the dispensing device abnormal state is set after the retry state is set. The line L4 is a line indicating the value of the first timer counter area 393 when the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is initialized, and the line L5 is the initialization of the second detection abnormality counter area 392. It is a line which shows the value of the 2nd timer counter area 394 when it is performed. Also, in FIG. 56, for convenience of explanation, the time interval at which each event such as a game ball payout occurs is shown more simplified than the actual time interval.

  First, a case where the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 becomes the abnormality reference value (abnormal reference number), specifically, “3” will be described.

  By adding information on the number of prize balls to the prize ball number storage area 374 at the timing of t1, the payout operation of the payout motor 257 (that is, the rotating body 256) is started. In addition, when the payout motor 257 performs a payout operation, a drive signal is output from the CPU 331, so the value in the drive counter area 378 is added as appropriate (updated as appropriate).

  Thereafter, when the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 at the timing of t2, the abnormality detection state is set, and among the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392, Since both are initial values, the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is incremented by one. Further, the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is updated from the initial value, whereby the periodic update of the first timer counter area 393 is started.

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at a timing t3 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L2. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized and the abnormality detection state is released. However, at this timing, the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is maintained without being initialized and the periodic update of the first timer counter area 393 is continued.

  Thereafter, the payout operation of the payout motor 257 is continued, and the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at a timing t4 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized. In this case, when such a situation occurs, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized in the first embodiment, but the initialization is not executed in the present embodiment. Therefore, the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is maintained. Further, the periodic update of the first timer counter area 393 is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 again, whereby the abnormality detection state is set. Further, 1 is added to both the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392. In this case, the periodic update of the first timer counter area 393 is continued, and the periodic update of the second timer counter area 394 is started.

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at a timing t6 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L2. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized and the abnormality detection state is released. However, at this timing, the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are maintained without being initialized. Further, the periodic update of the first timer counter area 393 and the second timer counter area 394 is continued.

  Thereafter, the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 again at the timing of t7 with the payout of a normal game ball in which no abnormality detection state is set, so that the first detection abnormality counter area 1 is added to both the value of 391 and the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392.

  In this case, the value of the first timer counter area 393 does not reach the value of the line L4. That is, 2 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t2 when the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is updated from the initial value to the timing t7. Then, the abnormality detection state is set three times from the timing t2 to the timing t7, and the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 reaches the abnormality reference value. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. When this dispensing device abnormal state is set, the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped as described above, and the stopped state is maintained. Moreover, abnormality notification is started and the abnormality notification is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, when the value of the first timer counter area 393 reaches the value of the line L4, that is, about 2 seconds have elapsed since the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is updated from the initial value. Thus, the first timer counter area 393 and the first detection abnormality counter area 391 are initialized.

  Thereafter, an abnormality canceling operation is performed at timing t9, so that the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is canceled, the state where the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped is canceled, and the abnormality notification is ended. Since the value of the second timer counter area 394 reaches the value of the line L5 at a timing before the timing of t9, the second timer counter area 394 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are initialized. .

  Next, the case where the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 does not become the abnormality reference value, but the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392 becomes the abnormality reference value will be described.

  At the timings t10 to t13, the same events as the timings t1 to t4 are generated. At the timing t13, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 reaches the switching reference number, and the payout speed of the payout motor 257 is switched to the low speed cycle.

  In this case, the output cycle of the drive signal output from the CPU 331 is slower than the normal cycle state, and accordingly, the cycle in which the value of the drive counter area 378 is updated is also delayed. On the other hand, the update of the first timer counter area 393 is performed every time the timer interrupt process is started in the CPU 331 and does not depend on the output period of the drive signal, and therefore the update period is not changed.

  After that, at the timing of t14, the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 again, whereby the abnormality detection state is set. Further, 1 is added to both the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392. In this case, the periodic update of the first timer counter area 393 is continued, and the periodic update of the second timer counter area 394 is started.

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at a timing t15 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L2. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized and the abnormality detection state is released. However, at this timing, the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are maintained without being initialized. Further, the periodic update of the first timer counter area 393 and the second timer counter area 394 is continued.

  In addition, at the timing of t15, information on the number of prize balls is newly added to the prize ball number storage area 374, and the information on the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 exceeds the switching reference number. The payout speed of the payout motor 257 is switched to the normal cycle. Along with this, the cycle in which the value of the drive counter area 378 is updated also returns to the original state.

  After that, when a normal game ball payout in which no abnormality detection state is set is inserted, the value of the first timer counter area 393 reaches the value of the line L4 at the timing t16, that is, the first detection abnormality counter. The first timer counter area 393 and the first detection abnormality counter area 391 are initialized when approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the update of the value of the area 391 from the initial value. In this case, the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is maintained without being initialized, and the periodic update of the second timer counter area 394 is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t17, the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 again, whereby the abnormality detection state is set. Further, 1 is added to both the value of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392. In this case, the periodic update of the second timer counter area 393 is continued and the periodic update of the first timer counter area 394 is started.

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at a timing t18 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L2. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized and the abnormality detection state is released. However, at this timing, the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are maintained without being initialized. Further, the periodic update of the first timer counter area 393 and the second timer counter area 394 is continued.

  Thereafter, the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 again at the timing of t19 with the payout of a normal game ball in which no abnormality detection state is set, so that the first detection abnormality counter area 1 is added to both the value of 391 and the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392.

  In this case, the value of the second timer counter area 394 does not reach the value of the line L5. That is, 2 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t14 when the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is updated from the initial value to the timing t19. The abnormality detection state is set three times from the timing t14 to the timing t19, and the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392 reaches the abnormality reference value. Therefore, at the timing of t19, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. When this dispensing device abnormal state is set, the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped as described above, and the stopped state is maintained. Moreover, abnormality notification is started and the abnormality notification is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t20, when the value of the second timer counter area 394 reaches the value of the line L5, that is, about 2 seconds have elapsed since the value of the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is updated from the initial value. As a result, the second timer counter area 394 and the first detection abnormality counter area 392 are initialized.

  Thereafter, an abnormality canceling operation is performed at timing t21, so that the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is canceled, the state where the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped is canceled, and the abnormality notification is ended. Since the value of the first timer counter area 393 reaches the value of the line L5 at a timing before the timing of t21, the second timer counter area 394 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are initialized. .

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, as in the first embodiment, even if an illegal act that prevents the game ball from being normally detected in the payout ball detection sensor 258 is performed, It is possible to deal with the fraud.

  In particular, in the reference period for determination, when the number of times specified that a special situation has occurred reaches the abnormality reference number, setting of the dispensing device abnormal state, etc. is suitable for the above fraudulent acts. Can deal with. For example, as in the case of the first embodiment, when a special situation is continuously performed without interposing a normal game ball payout in which a special situation does not occur, setting of a payout device abnormal state is performed. In the configuration to be performed, it is not possible to cope with the fraudulent act that is performed in such a way that a normal game ball payout in which no special situation intentionally occurs. On the other hand, if the fraudulent act cannot be performed for a predetermined period after one fraudulent act, even if the fraudulent act is performed without setting the dispensing device abnormal state, etc., It is possible to reduce the number of game balls paid out per unit time due to cheating.

  In addition, it is considered that the situation in which the game ball does not enter the recess 256a of the sliding rotor 256 with respect to the circumferential surface of the rotor 256 is difficult to occur immediately after the situation is once resolved. On the other hand, it is considered that the above fraudulent acts are performed continuously. On the other hand, when the number of times that the special situation has occurred within the reference period for determination as described above reaches the number of times of abnormality, the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is performed. The fraudulent act can be handled while suppressing the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state at a timing before the retry operation is executed in a situation where the fraudulent act is not performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special situation has occurred while the values of the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are initial values, the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are displayed when the determination reference period has elapsed. Since the initialization is performed, it is possible to monitor whether or not the number of occurrences of the special situation has reached the number of times of abnormality within the determination reference period, starting from the occurrence of the special situation. Therefore, compared with a configuration in which the determination reference period is measured regardless of whether or not a special situation has occurred and the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are initialized as the measurement progresses, the above-described determination reference period is within the above range. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor whether or not the occurrence number of the special situation has reached the abnormality reference number.

  Further, the number of detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 is set to two, which is “the number of abnormality reference times−1”. Further, when it is specified that a special situation has occurred in the situation where the values of the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are initial values, only the first detection abnormality counter area 391 is updated, and each detection abnormality counter is updated. When at least one of the areas 391 and 392 is not the initial value, both detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are updated. Further, the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are initialized when the determination reference period elapses after the update from the initial value. As a result, every time the special situation occurs, it is possible to start monitoring the abnormality reference count starting from the occurrence of the special situation. Therefore, it is possible to perform the monitoring of the number of times of abnormality reference in a range that is shifted by one special situation, and it is possible to suitably monitor the number of times of abnormality reference.

  Further, the number of detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 is set to “abnormal reference number—1”. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately cope with the illegal acts while suppressing the number of detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392, that is, suppressing an increase in storage capacity necessary for specifying the illegal acts.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 is different from that in the first embodiment. This different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As in the first embodiment, the payout control board 322 is electrically connected to the main control board 301 and the payout device 224, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 receives a command input from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301. The payout device 224 is driven and controlled based on the above. Further, the payout control board 322 is electrically connected to the payout display lamp unit 27, and the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 controls the payout display lamp part 27 to emit light.

  In the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322, a prize ball number storage area 374, a rented ball number storage area 375, a payout number counter area 376, a drive counter area 378, a detection abnormality counter area 379, a payout specifying counter area 380, etc. The same areas as those in the first embodiment are set. In the RAM 333 of the present embodiment, a winning unit counter area 401 and a rented unit counter area 402 are set separately.

  The winning unit counter area 401 is composed of 1 byte. The winning unit counter area 401 is not limited to 1 byte. If the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 executes the process using the winning unit counter area 401 well, it is less than 1 byte, that is, 8 bytes. It may be less than a bit or 2 bytes or more.

  The winning unit counter area 401 specifies, in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322, the number of winning balls corresponding to the input of one winning ball command from the information on the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number storage area 374. Used in In other words, the winning unit counter area 401 specifies, in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322, the number of winning balls corresponding to one winning among the information on the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number storage area 374. Used in

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, when the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 374 is equal to or less than the permitted reference number, the prize ball is permitted and a prize ball permission signal is sent from the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. Is output, and the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 outputs a prize ball command only when a prize ball permission signal is input. The permission reference number is set to be equal to or less than the minimum number of winning balls among the number of winning balls set in plural types. Accordingly, the award ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 stores the total number of award balls corresponding to the input of the award ball command twice. Under such circumstances, at least two winning unit counter areas 401 are set in order to individually identify the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning ball command.

  The rental unit counter area 402 is composed of 1 byte. The ball rental unit counter area 402 is not limited to 1 byte. If the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 performs processing using the ball rental unit counter area 402 well, it is less than 1 byte. That is, it may be less than 8 bits or 2 bytes or more.

  The ball rental unit counter area 402 is input from the ball lending device Y based on one lending operation among the information on the number of balls stored in the lending number storage area 375 in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322. This is used to identify the number of lent balls corresponding to the rented rent request signal. In this case, as described in the first embodiment, only the information on the number of rents based on one rent operation is stored in the rent number storage area 375 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. Is done. Accordingly, unlike the winning unit counter area 401, a plurality of the rental unit counter areas 402 are not provided. In addition, in the structure where the information on the number of rents based on a plurality of renting operations is stored in the rented number storage area 375 of the RAM 333, a plurality of rented unit counter areas 402 are provided correspondingly. Also good.

  Next, winning unit setting processing executed by the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The winning unit setting process is executed when the CPU 331 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command to the prize ball number storage area 374. For example, the winning unit setting process is executed as part of the process of step S1809 in the winning ball setting process (FIG. 40).

  In the winning unit setting process, first, in step S3101, a winning unit counter area 401 to be set is specified. For example, when both of the two winning unit counter areas 401 set are initial values, one of the winning unit counter areas 401 is specified as a setting target. If one of the two set winning unit counter areas 401 is not the initial value, the winning unit counter area 401 on the side having the initial value is specified as a setting target.

  In the subsequent step S3102, the number of prize balls added to or added to the prize ball number storage area 374 this time, that is, the number of prize balls corresponding to the current prize ball command is added to the winning unit counter area 401 specified in step S3101. Do (update). Thereafter, the setting process for the winning unit is completed.

  In addition, in the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322, when adding the number of rents corresponding to the rent request signal to the rented number storage area 375, the renting unit setting process is executed accordingly. For example, the lending unit setting process is executed as part of the process of step S1908 in the lending setting process (FIG. 41).

  Next, payout control processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The payout control process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) of the CPU 331, as in the first embodiment.

  In the payout control process, first, a payout state setting process is executed in step S3201, a drive signal output process is executed in step S3202, and a ball detection process is executed in step S3203. The processes in steps S3201 to S3203 are the same as the processes in steps S2101 to S2103 of the payout control process (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S3204, it is determined whether or not the processing result of the ball detection processing is a processing result indicating that the game ball has been paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a payout identification flag is stored in the RAM 333. If the payout identification flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not a renting operation is in progress.

  If the ball lending operation is not in progress, a prize ball initialization process is executed in step S3206. Here, the prize ball initialization process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the prize ball initialization process, first, in step S3301, a winning unit counter area 401 to be updated is specified. This specification is performed based on information stored in the update target specification area of the RAM 333, for example.

  In the subsequent step S3302, the information of the update target winning unit counter area 401 specified in step S3301 is updated. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated. In the subsequent step S3303, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated is an initial value, specifically, “0”.

  If the value in the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated is not the initial value, the process proceeds to step S3305 without executing the process in step S3304. If the value of the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated is the initial value, the process proceeds to step S3304.

  In step S3304, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized. Here, when the value of the winning unit counter area 401 becomes the initial value after the value of the winning unit counter area 401 is decremented, the number of winning balls corresponding to one input of the winning ball command is paid out. Means completed. In this case, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is configured to be initialized so that the detection abnormality counter area 379 can receive the number of prize balls corresponding to the input of a single prize ball command. It is initialized every time it is completed. In other words, in the present embodiment, with respect to the payout of prize balls, the number of times that the abnormality detection state is set is specified within the range of prize ball payout corresponding to one prize ball command input. .

  In step S 3304, the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated in the prize ball initialization process is changed. Thereby, in the next prize ball initialization process, the winning unit counter area 401 on the side different from the current winning unit counter area 401 is set as an update target.

  Thereafter, after the processing of step S3305 and step S3306 is executed, the winning ball initialization processing is terminated. The processes in steps S3305 and S3306 are the same as the processes in steps S2503 and S2504 of the initialization process (FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

  Returning to the explanation of the payout control process (FIG. 59), after executing the prize ball initialization process in step S3206, the payout control process is terminated after executing the processes in steps S3207 to S3211. Each process of these step S3207-step S3211 is the same as each process of step S2108-step S2112 of the payout control process (FIG. 43) in the said 1st Embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S3205 that the ball lending operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made, and the flow proceeds to step S3212. In step S3212, a ball rental initialization process is executed. In the ball rental initialization process, the ball rental unit counter area 402 is updated, and when the value of the ball rental unit counter area 402 becomes the initial value, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized. Further, processing similar to that in step S3305 and step S3306 in the prize ball initialization processing (FIG. 60) is executed.

  Here, when the value of the rental unit counter area 402 becomes the initial value after 1 is subtracted from the value of the rental unit counter area 402, it is input from the rental device Y based on a single rental operation. This means that the payout of the number of balls corresponding to the received ball rental request signal has been completed. In this case, by setting the detection abnormality counter area 379 to be initialized, the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is input from the ball lending device Y based on one lending operation with respect to paying out a rental ball. It is initialized every time the payout of the number of balls corresponding to the received ball rental request signal is completed. In other words, in the present embodiment, an abnormality is detected within the range of paying out the number of balls corresponding to the ball rental request signal input from the ball rental device Y based on a single ball rental operation. The number of times the state is set is specified.

  After executing the lending initialization process, the processes in steps S3213 and S3214 are executed, and the payout control process is terminated. Each process of step S3213 and step S3214 is the same as each process of step S2113 and step S2114 of the payout control process (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S3204 that the payout specifying flag is not stored in the RAM 333, the process proceeds to step S3215 to execute the payout monitoring process, and then the payout control process ends. The processing contents of the payout monitoring process are the same as the payout monitoring process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment.

  Here, as described above, regarding the payout of prize balls, the value in the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized every time the number of prize balls corresponding to the input of a single prize ball command is completed. . In this case, in the payout monitoring process, when the abnormality detection state is set and the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 becomes the abnormality reference value (abnormal reference number), specifically, “2” is obtained. In such a case, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. That is, when the abnormality detection state is set twice until the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to one prize ball command is completed, the setting of the payout device abnormal state is performed.

  In addition, with regard to paying out a rented ball, the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized every time the number of rented balls corresponding to one renting operation is paid out. In this case, in the payout monitoring process, when the abnormality detection state is set and the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 becomes the abnormality reference value (abnormal reference number), specifically, “2” is obtained. In such a case, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. That is, when the abnormality detection state is set twice until the payout of the number of lent balls corresponding to one renting operation is completed, the payout device abnormal state is set.

  Next, how to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. In the following description, a case will be described where game balls are paid out based on the addition of prize ball number information to the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The same applies to the case where game balls are paid out based on the addition of information on the number of rented balls to the storage area 375. Further, the case where the payout motor 257 is maintained in the normal cycle will be described. However, even if the payout motor 257 is changed to the low speed cycle or maintained in the low speed cycle, only the time between the timings is increased. The aspect of is the same.

  In FIG. 61, the line L1 is a line indicating the value of the drive counter area 378 when the abnormality detection state is set, and the line L2 is the line of the drive counter area 378 when the retry state is set. The line L3 is a line indicating the value of the drive counter area 378 when the dispensing device abnormal state is set after the retry state is set.

  The payout operation of the payout motor 257 (that is, the rotating body 256) is started by adding the prize ball number to the prize ball number storage area 374 at the timing of t1. In this case, the number of prize balls this time corresponds to 15 prize balls, and information on the number of 15 prize balls is added to the winning unit counter area 401 of the RAM 333. In addition, when the payout motor 257 performs a payout operation, a drive signal is output from the CPU 331, so the value in the drive counter area 378 is added as appropriate (updated as appropriate).

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at each of the timings t2 and t3. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized at each timing. Also, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning unit counter area 401 at each timing. However, since the information on the number of prize balls for one game ball or more is still stored in the prize ball number storage area 374, the payout operation of the payout motor 257 is continued, and accordingly the drive counter after the timing of t3. The value of area 378 is added as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 at the timing of t4, the abnormality detection state is set and the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at a timing t5 before the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L2. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized and the abnormality detection state is released. Also, 1 is subtracted from the value in the winning unit counter area 401. However, at this timing, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is maintained without being initialized.

  Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out at each of the timings t6 and t7. As a result, the drive counter area 378 is initialized at each timing. Also, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning unit counter area 401 at each timing. However, since the information on the number of prize balls for one game ball or more is still stored in the prize ball number storage area 374, the payout operation of the payout motor 257 is continued, and accordingly the drive counter after the timing of t7. The value of area 378 is added as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the value of the drive counter area 378 reaches the value of the line L1 again at the timing t8, which is the timing before the value of the winning unit counter area 401 becomes the initial value, the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is changed. When 1 is added and the value becomes “2”, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. When this dispensing device abnormal state is set, the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped as described above, and the stopped state is maintained. Moreover, abnormality notification is started and the abnormality notification is continued.

  Thereafter, an abnormality canceling operation is performed at timing t9, so that the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is canceled, the state where the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped is canceled, and the abnormality notification is ended. Also, the detection abnormality counter area 379 and the winning unit counter area 401 are initialized.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, as in the first embodiment, even if an illegal act that prevents the game ball from being normally detected in the payout ball detection sensor 258 is performed, It is possible to deal with the fraud.

  Within the range where game balls are paid out in response to one winning, when the number of times specified as a special situation has reached the abnormal reference number, setting of an abnormal state of the payout device is performed. By doing so, it is possible to suitably cope with the above fraud. For example, as in the case of the first embodiment, when a special situation is continuously performed without interposing a normal game ball payout in which a special situation does not occur, setting of a payout device abnormal state is performed. In the configuration to be performed, it is not possible to cope with the fraudulent act that is performed in such a way that a normal game ball payout in which no special situation intentionally occurs. On the other hand, if the cheating can be performed only once per winning, even if the cheating is performed while the setting of the payout device abnormal state is not performed, It is possible to reduce the number of game balls to be paid out.

  In addition, it is considered that the situation in which the game ball does not enter the recess 256a of the sliding rotor 256 with respect to the circumferential surface of the rotor 256 is difficult to occur immediately after the situation is once resolved. On the other hand, it is considered that the above fraudulent acts are performed continuously. On the other hand, when the number of times that the special situation has occurred within the range in which the game balls corresponding to one win are paid out as described above reaches the abnormal reference number By setting the dispensing device abnormal status, etc., the setting of the dispensing device abnormal status, etc. is performed at a timing before the retry operation is executed in the situation where the above fraud is not performed. The above fraudulent acts can be dealt with while suppressing the above.

  In addition, whether or not the number of times specified that a special situation has occurred within the range where game balls are paid out corresponding to one win has reached the abnormal reference number is determined on the payout control board 322. In a configuration in which the winning unit counter area 401 set in the RAM 333 is used, the number of the winning unit counter area 401 can be collectively stored in the winning ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 as payout number information. It was a few minutes. As a result, the illegal acts can be monitored for each winning prize, and the monitoring can be performed satisfactorily.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a period during which a game ball is continuously detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258 is calculated using the payout specifying counter area 380, and based on the calculation result, the payout device 224 An anomaly is identified. This different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, abnormality monitoring of the payout device 224 is executed in the ball detection process in step S2103 of the payout control process (FIG. 43). Incidentally, also in the payout control process of the present embodiment, the payout monitoring process in step S2105 and the initialization process in step S2106 are executed. However, in the payout monitoring process in this embodiment, the retry state is set and released, and the payout device abnormal state after the retry state is set and released, but the abnormality detection state is set and released. And the setting and cancellation of the dispensing device abnormal state based on the occurrence of the abnormality detection state a plurality of times are not executed. In the initialization process in the present embodiment, the initialization process of the drive counter area 378 and the release of the retry state are performed, but the initialization of the detection abnormality counter area 379 and the cancellation of the abnormality detection state are not executed.

  Next, the sphere detection process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the ball detection process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the dispensing device is in an abnormal state. If the payout device is not in an abnormal state, the process advances to step S3402 to determine whether or not the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is a HI level signal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not information “1” is input as the payout detection information to the input port.

  If it is not an HI level signal, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not a sphere detection completion state is reached. Here, the ball detection completion state is set when the electric signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal and the payout of the game ball is specified by the CPU 331, and the electric signal is HI. When the level signal is switched to the LOW level signal and specified by the CPU 331, the signal is released. The sphere detection completion state is set by storing the sphere detection completion state flag in the sphere detection completion state flag storage area of the RAM 333, and the sphere detection completion state is canceled by deleting the sphere detection completion state flag. Is called. Further, the determination as to whether or not the sphere detection completion state is reached is made by determining whether or not a sphere detection completion state flag is stored.

  If the sphere detection is not completed, the process proceeds to step S3406 without executing the processes in steps S3404 and S3405. If it is in a sphere detection completion state, the process proceeds to step S3404. In step S3404, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is detected. If the abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to step S3406 without executing the process of step S3405. If not in the abnormality detection state, the detection abnormality counter area 379 of the RAM 333 is initialized, that is, cleared to “0” in step S3405, and then the process proceeds to step S3406.

  In step S3406, the payout specifying counter area 380 is initialized, specifically, “0” is cleared. If the CPU 331 specifies that the payout ball detection sensor 258 has not detected a game ball, the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is maintained at the initial value. In step S3406, the abnormality detection state is canceled and the ball detection completion state is canceled. Incidentally, in the process of step S3406, when the abnormality detection state is not set or when the ball detection completion state is not set, those states are maintained. After executing the process of step S3406, the main ball detection process is terminated.

  If the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is an HI level signal, an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, and the flow proceeds to step S3407. In step S3407, the payout specifying counter area 380 is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the payout specifying counter area 380. In the subsequent step S3408, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is equal to or greater than a detection completion reference value (first number of confirmations), specifically, “2” or greater. The detection completion reference value is not limited to “2”, and may be “3” or “4” or more, for example.

  Here, the payout control process (FIG. 43) having the ball detection process as a part of the process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) activated at a cycle of 2 msec. It is executed every time the process is started. Accordingly, the ball detection process is also started at a cycle of about 2 msec, and when the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is an HI level signal, the process of step S3407, that is, the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is set. The process of adding 1 is executed at a cycle of about 2 msec. Therefore, in the case where it is determined in step S3408 that the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is “2” or more, the period in which the input of the HI level signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is continued for the first detection. It means that about 4 msec or more has passed as a period.

  If it is not “2” or more, the main ball detection process is terminated as it is. If it is “2” or more, it is determined in step S3409 whether or not the ball detection is complete. If it is in the sphere detection completion state, the process proceeds to step S3411 without executing the process of step S3410. If it is not in the sphere detection completion state, the process proceeds to step S3410.

  In step S3410, the payout specific flag is stored in the payout specific flag storage area of the RAM 333, and the ball detection completion state is set. As described in the first embodiment, whether or not the payout specifying flag is present is determined in step S2104 of the payout control process (FIG. 43), and a process corresponding to the determination result is executed.

  Note that the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is set by setting the sphere detection completion state in step S3410 and not performing the process in step S3410 when it is specified in step S3409 that the sphere detection completion state is set. In the situation where the value is “2” or more and the value is not initialized, it is prevented that the payout specific flag is repeatedly stored.

  In a succeeding step S3411, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is detected. When it is in the abnormality detection state, the main ball detection process is finished as it is. If not in the abnormality detection state, it is determined in step S3412 whether or not the value in the payout specifying counter area 380 is equal to or greater than “30” as the detection abnormality reference value (second confirmation count). If the value in the payout specifying counter area 380 is not equal to or greater than “30”, the main ball detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is “30” or more, the process advances to step S3413.

  In step S3413, an abnormality detection state is set. Further, the information in the detection abnormality counter area 379 of the RAM 333 is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379.

  Here, the payout control process (FIG. 43) having the ball detection process as a part of the process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) activated at a cycle of 2 msec. It is executed every time the process is started. Accordingly, the ball detection process is also started at a cycle of about 2 msec, and when the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is an HI level signal, the process of step S3407, that is, the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is set. The process of adding 1 is executed at a cycle of about 2 msec. Therefore, in the case where it is determined in step S3412 that the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is “30” or more, the period in which the input of the HI level signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is continued for the second detection. It means that about 60 msec or more has passed as a period.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the payout motor 257 (that is, the rotating body 256) performs a payout operation in a normal cycle, the payout ball detection is performed if the payout device 224 is in a normal state. The detection signal input from the sensor 258 is changed to the LOW level signal in about 20 msec after the detection signal becomes the HI level signal. Further, when the payout motor 257 is executing a payout operation at a low speed cycle, if the payout device 224 is in a normal state, the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 becomes the HI level signal. The LOW level signal is switched in about 40 msec. Therefore, the state in which the period during which the HI level signal is continuously input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 as described above has passed for about 60 msec or more means that the game ball has not been normally paid out. . In such a situation, by adding 1 to the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379, the CPU 331 can specify the number of times the abnormality detection state is set.

  The period of 60 msec is a period shorter than the period in which the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out and then does not specify the game ball and the retry operation is started by the payout motor 257.

  In addition, the abnormality detection state is set in step S3413, and when the abnormality detection state is specified in step S3411, the processing in step S3412 and subsequent steps is not performed, so that the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is changed. It is prevented that the information in the detection abnormality counter area 379 is repeatedly updated in a situation where the value is “30” or more and the value is not initialized.

  In the subsequent step S3414, it is determined whether or not the value of the detected abnormality counter area 379 is equal to or greater than “2” as the abnormality reference value (abnormal reference number) (determines whether or not the abnormality reference number has been reached).

  Here, as already described, when the detection signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is a LOW level signal and the ball detection completion state is not the abnormality detection state, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized to detect the ball. In the completed state and the abnormality detection state, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is not initialized. In the configuration in which the ball detection completion state is canceled in step S3406, when the detection signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is a LOW level signal and the ball detection completion state, the game ball detection is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258. Means that it is time to complete. In this case, by setting the initialization condition of the detection abnormality counter area 379 as described above, the detection abnormality counter area when the detection of the game ball is completed by the payout ball detection sensor 258 in a state where the abnormality detection state is not obtained. When the detection of the gaming ball is completed by the payout ball detection sensor 258 in the situation where the abnormality detection state is established, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is not initialized. Therefore, when the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is “2” or more, the switching is performed beyond the timing when the detection signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 should switch from the HI level signal to the LOW level signal. It means that no situation occurred continuously.

  When the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is not “2” or more, the main ball detection process is ended as it is. When the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is “2” or more, the processing of step S3415 is executed, and then the main ball detection process is ended. In step S3415, the dispensing device abnormal state is set, abnormality notification start processing and abnormality detection state cancellation are executed. These processes are the same as those in step S2607 of the payout monitoring process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment.

  If a dispensing device abnormal state is set in step S3415, an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, and the flow proceeds to step S3416. In step S3416, it is determined whether an abnormality canceling operation has been performed.

  If the abnormality canceling operation has not been performed, the main ball detection process is terminated as it is. If an abnormality canceling operation has been performed, the processing of step S3417 is executed, and then the main ball detection processing is terminated. In step S3417, cancellation of the dispensing device abnormal state, termination processing of abnormality notification, and various initialization processes are executed. In the various initialization processes, at least initialization of the payout specifying counter area 380 and the detection abnormality counter area 379 is executed.

  Next, how to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. In the following description, a case will be described where game balls are paid out based on the addition of prize ball number information to the prize ball number storage area 374 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. The same applies to the case where game balls are paid out based on the addition of information on the number of rented balls to the storage area 375. Further, the case where the payout motor 257 is maintained in the normal cycle will be described. However, even if the payout motor 257 is changed to the low speed cycle or maintained in the low speed cycle, only the time between the timings is increased. The aspect of is the same.

  In FIG. 63, a line L1 is a line indicating the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 when the CPU 331 specifies that a game ball has been paid out, and the line L2 is set for an abnormality detection state. This is a line indicating the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 in the case of

  First, a case where the abnormality detection state is not reached will be described.

  The payout operation of the payout motor 257 (that is, the rotating body 256) is started by adding the prize ball number to the prize ball number storage area 374 at the timing of t1. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the CPU 331 specifies that the detection of the game ball is started by the payout ball detection sensor 258. As a result, the value in the payout specifying counter area 380 is added as appropriate (updated as appropriate).

  Thereafter, when the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 reaches the value of the line L1 at the timing of t3, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out. Thereafter, the CPU 331 specifies that the detection of the game ball in the payout ball detection sensor 258 is completed at the timing t4 before the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 reaches the value of the line L2. Accordingly, the payout specifying counter area 380 is initialized without setting the abnormality detection state. After that, the same events as the timings t2 to t4 occur at the timings t5 to t7.

  Next, a case will be described in which an abnormality detection state is set and then a dispensing device abnormality state is set.

  In a situation where the payout operation of the payout motor 257 is being performed, the CPU 331 specifies that the detection of the game ball is started by the payout ball detection sensor 258 at the timing of t8. Thereby, the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is added as appropriate. Thereafter, when the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 reaches the value of the line L1 at the timing of t9, the CPU 331 specifies that the game ball has been paid out.

  Thereafter, when the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 reaches the value of the line L2 at the timing of t10, the abnormality detection state is set and the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the CPU 331 specifies that the detection of the game ball is completed by the payout ball detection sensor 258. Thereby, the payout specifying counter area 380 is initialized and the abnormality detection state is canceled. However, at this timing, the stored abnormality counter area 379 is maintained without being initialized. That is, even after the abnormal detection state is established, even if the CPU 331 specifies that the detection of the game ball is completed by the payout ball detection sensor 258, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is not initialized.

  Thereafter, when the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 reaches the value of the line L2 again at the timing t12, the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is incremented by 1, and the value becomes “2”. The payout device abnormal state is set. When this dispensing device abnormal state is set, the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped, and the stopped state is maintained. Moreover, abnormality notification is started and the abnormality notification is continued. Thereafter, an abnormality canceling operation is performed at timing t13, so that the setting of the dispensing device abnormal state is canceled, the state where the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 257 is stopped is canceled, and the abnormality notification is ended. Also, the payout specifying counter area 380 is initialized.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

  In the situation where the detection signal of the paying ball detection sensor 258 is maintained at the HI level signal, the situation where the LOW level signal is not set despite the specific timing is designated as a special situation, and a special situation is identified. Based on what has been done, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. In an illegal act that prevents the game ball from being normally detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258, the act of maintaining the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 at the HI level signal corresponding to the state where the game ball passes. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with the illegal acts by specifying the occurrence of the special situation as described above.

  Further, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior, a configuration for specifying that a situation has occurred in which the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become a HI level signal in a situation where drive control to the payout motor 257 is being performed. Is also possible. However, in this configuration, it is difficult to distinguish between a case where a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258 and a case where the above fraudulent act is being performed. In contrast, when a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258, the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become the HI level signal. Therefore, in the situation where the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 is maintained at the HI level signal as described above, the special situation where the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become the LOW level signal despite the specific timing. It is possible to distinguish between a case where a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258 and a case where the above fraud is being performed. .

  In order to prevent the CPU 331 from specifying that the game ball has been paid out when the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 becomes an HI level signal due to the influence of noise or the like, the CPU 331 outputs an HI level signal. Is specified using the payout specifying counter area 380 of the RAM 333, it is determined that the game ball has been paid out. In this case, the timing for specifying that a special situation has occurred is measured using the payout specifying counter area 380. Thereby, the above-described excellent effect can be obtained while suppressing the complexity of the software configuration and the hardware configuration.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 is different from that in the second embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a period during which a game ball is continuously detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258 is calculated using the payout specifying counter area 380, and based on the calculation result, the payout device 224 An anomaly is identified. This different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the second embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, abnormality monitoring of the payout device 224 is executed in the ball detection process in step S2704 of the payout control process (FIG. 52). Further, when monitoring the abnormality of the dispensing device 224, the first detection abnormality counter area 391, the second detection abnormality counter area 392, the first timer counter area 393, and the second timer counter area 394 are used (see FIG. 51). Then, by executing the timer update process (FIG. 53) of step S2701 of the payout control process (FIG. 52), the update process of each timer counter area 393, 394, each detected abnormality counter area 391, 392, and each timer Initialization processing of the counter areas 393 and 394 is executed.

  Incidentally, the payout monitoring process of step S2706 is also executed in the payout control process of the present embodiment. However, in the payout monitoring process in this embodiment, the retry state is set and released, and the payout device abnormal state after the retry state is set and released, but the abnormality detection state is set and released. And the setting and cancellation of the dispensing device abnormal state based on the occurrence of the abnormality detection state a plurality of times are not executed. In the process of step S2708 in the payout control process of the present embodiment, the retry state is released, but the abnormality detection state is not released.

  Next, the sphere detection process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the sphere detection process in the present embodiment executes the same process as the sphere detection process (FIG. 62) in the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the description of this similar process is basically omitted.

  In the ball detection process, it is determined in step S3501 whether or not the payout device is in an abnormal state, and in step S3502, it is determined whether or not the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is an HI level signal. If it is not an HI level signal, the processing of step S3503 is executed, and then the main ball detection processing is terminated. Note that the processing in step S3503 is the same as step S3406 in the sphere detection processing (FIG. 62) in the fourth embodiment.

  If the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is a HI level signal, the processing from step S3504 is executed. Each process of step S3504 to step S3509 is the same as each process of step S3407 to step S3412 of the sphere detection process (FIG. 62) in the fourth embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S3509 that the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is not equal to or greater than “30”, the main ball detection process is terminated as it is. If the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 is “30” or more, that is, if the period during which the input of the HI level signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 continues for about 60 msec or longer, step S3510 is performed. Execute the detection abnormality counter update process.

  The detection abnormality counter update process is the same as the detection abnormality counter update process (FIG. 55) in the second embodiment. Thus, when both the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 are initial values, the value of only the first detection abnormality counter area 391 out of these both detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392. 1 is added, and when at least one of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 or the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is not an initial value, the values of both detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are each added by one.

  In a succeeding step S3511, after the abnormality detection state is set, the process proceeds to a step S3512. In step S3512, whether one of the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 out of the first detection abnormality counter area 391 and the second detection abnormality counter area 392 is “3” or more as an abnormality reference value (abnormal reference number). Determine. When both the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 are not “3” or more, the main ball detection processing is ended as it is. If any one of the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 is “3” or more, the main ball detection process is terminated after the process of step S3513 is executed. In step S3513, setting of the dispensing device abnormal state, abnormality notification start processing, and cancellation of the abnormality detection state are executed.

  If a dispensing device abnormal state is set in step S3513, an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, and the flow proceeds to step S3514. The processing after step S3514 is the same as the processing after step S3416 of the sphere detection processing (FIG. 62) in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the second embodiment.

  In the situation where the detection signal of the paying ball detection sensor 258 is maintained at the HI level signal, the situation where the LOW level signal is not set despite the specific timing is designated as a special situation, and a special situation is identified. Based on what has been done, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. In an illegal act that prevents the game ball from being normally detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258, the act of maintaining the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 at the HI level signal corresponding to the state where the game ball passes. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with the illegal acts by specifying the occurrence of the special situation as described above.

  Further, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior, a configuration for specifying that a situation has occurred in which the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become a HI level signal in a situation where drive control to the payout motor 257 is being performed. Is also possible. However, in this configuration, it is difficult to distinguish between a case where a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258 and a case where the above fraudulent act is being performed. In contrast, when a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258, the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become the HI level signal. Therefore, in the situation where the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 is maintained at the HI level signal as described above, the special situation where the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become the LOW level signal despite the specific timing. It is possible to distinguish between a case where a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258 and a case where the above fraud is being performed. .

  In order to prevent the CPU 331 from specifying that the game ball has been paid out when the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 becomes an HI level signal due to the influence of noise or the like, the CPU 331 outputs an HI level signal. Is specified using the payout specifying counter area 380 of the RAM 333, it is determined that the game ball has been paid out. In this case, the timing for specifying that a special situation has occurred is measured using the payout specifying counter area 380. Thereby, the above-described excellent effect can be obtained while suppressing the complexity of the software configuration and the hardware configuration.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 is different from that of the third embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a period during which a game ball is continuously detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258 is calculated using the payout specifying counter area 380, and based on the calculation result, the payout device 224 An anomaly is identified. This different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the third embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  First, the payout control process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The payout control process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) of the CPU 331, as in the third embodiment.

  In the payout control process, a payout state setting process is executed in step S3601, and a drive signal output process is executed in step S3602. The processes in steps S3601 and S3602 are the same as the processes in steps S3201 and S3202 of the payout control process (FIG. 59) in the third embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S3603, it is determined whether or not a ball rental operation is being performed. If the ball lending operation is not being performed, the award ball detecting process is executed in step S3604, and then the process proceeds to step S3606. If the ball lending operation is being performed, the ball lending detection process is performed in step S3605. After the execution, go to step S3606.

  In the prize ball detection process, whether or not a game ball is paid out is specified using the payout specifying counter area 380 of the RAM 333, and abnormality of the payout device 224 is monitored using the winning unit counter area 401 of the RAM 333. Is done. In the ball rental ball detection process, whether or not a game ball is paid out is specified using the payout specifying counter area 380 of the RAM 333, and an abnormality of the payout device 224 is monitored using the ball rental unit counter area 402 of the RAM 333. Executed. In these award ball detection processing and the rental ball detection processing, the former uses the winning unit counter area 401 for monitoring the abnormality of the payout device 224, whereas the latter uses the rental unit counter. Although different in that the area 402 is used, the processing contents are basically the same. Accordingly, the details of the prize ball detection process will be described later.

  In step S3606, it is determined whether or not the processing result of the ball detection processing is a processing result indicating that the game ball has been paid out. If the CPU 331 does not specify the payout of the game ball, the payout control process is terminated after the payout monitoring process is executed in step S3607.

  In the payout monitoring process according to the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the retry state is set and released, and the payout device abnormal state after the retry state is set and released. However, unlike the third embodiment, the setting and cancellation of the abnormality detection state and the setting and cancellation of the dispensing device abnormality state based on the occurrence of the abnormality detection state a plurality of times are not executed.

  If the CPU 331 specifies the game ball payout, the process advances to step S3608. In step S3608, initialization of the drive counter area 378 is executed. In a succeeding step S3609, it is determined whether or not the ball lending operation is being performed.

  If the ball lending operation is not in progress, the payout control process is terminated after executing the processes of steps S3610 to S3614. The processes in steps S3610 to S3614 are the same as the processes in steps S3207 to S3211 of the payout control process (FIG. 59) in the third embodiment.

  If the ball lending operation is in progress, the payout control process is terminated after executing the processes of steps S3615 and S3616. Each process of step S3615 and step S3616 is the same as each process of step S3213 and step S3214 of the payout control process (FIG. 59) in the third embodiment.

  Next, the winning ball detection processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The prize ball detection process is similar to the ball detection process (FIG. 62) in the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the description of this similar process is basically omitted.

  In the winning ball detection process, it is determined in step S3701 whether or not the payout device is in an abnormal state, and in step S3702, it is determined whether or not the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is an HI level signal. To do. If it is not a HI level signal, the process proceeds to step S3703.

  In step S3703, it is determined whether or not the sphere detection is complete. If the ball detection is not completed, the process proceeds to step S3708 as it is. If it is in a sphere detection completion state, the process proceeds to step S3704.

  In steps S3704 to S3707, processing similar to that in steps S3301 to S3304 in the prize ball initialization processing (FIG. 60) in the third embodiment is executed. That is, in step S3704, the update target winning unit counter area 401 is specified. In the subsequent step S3705, the information of the payout unit counter area 401 to be updated specified in step S3704 is updated. In the following step S3706, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated is an initial value, specifically, “0”.

  If the value of the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated is not the initial value, the process proceeds to step S3708 without executing the process of step S3707. If the value of the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated is the initial value, the process proceeds to step S3707. In step S3707, the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized, and the winning unit counter area 401 to be updated next time is changed.

  Here, when the value of the winning unit counter area 401 becomes the initial value after the value of the winning unit counter area 401 is decremented, the number of winning balls corresponding to one input of the winning ball command is paid out. Means completed. In this case, the detection abnormality counter area 379 is initialized so that the value of the detection abnormality counter area 379 corresponds to the number of prize balls corresponding to one prize ball command input. It is initialized every time the payout is completed. That is, in the same way as in the third embodiment, with respect to the payout of the prize ball, the abnormality detection state is set within the range of the prize ball payout corresponding to one input of the prize ball command. The number of times is specified.

  In addition, as described above, the processes in steps S3704 to S3707 are executed when the detection signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is the LOW level signal and the ball detection is complete. When the detection signal from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is a LOW level signal and the ball detection is complete, it means that the detection of the game ball in the payout ball detection sensor 258 is completed. That is, the updating of the winning unit counter area 401 and the initialization of the detection abnormality counter area 379 are executed when the detection of the game ball is completed in the payout ball detection sensor 258.

  In step S3708, the payout specifying counter area 380 is initialized, specifically, “0” is cleared. In step S3708, the abnormality detection state is canceled and the ball detection completion state is canceled. After executing the process of step S3708, the present ball detection process is ended.

  If the detection signal input from the payout ball detection sensor 258 is an HI level signal, an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, and the flow proceeds to step S3709. Each process of step S3709 to step S3717 is the same as each process of step S3407 to step S3415 of the sphere detection process (FIG. 62) in the fourth embodiment.

  If a dispensing device abnormal state is set in step S3717, an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, and the flow proceeds to step S3718. Each process of step S3718 and step S3719 is the same as each process of step S3416 and step S3417 of the ball detection process (FIG. 62) in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the third embodiment.

  In the situation where the detection signal of the paying ball detection sensor 258 is maintained at the HI level signal, the situation where the LOW level signal is not set despite the specific timing is designated as a special situation, and a special situation is identified. Based on what has been done, the dispensing device abnormal state is set. In an illegal act that prevents the game ball from being normally detected by the payout ball detection sensor 258, the act of maintaining the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 at the HI level signal corresponding to the state where the game ball passes. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with the illegal acts by specifying the occurrence of the special situation as described above.

  Further, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior, a configuration for specifying that a situation has occurred in which the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become a HI level signal in a situation where drive control to the payout motor 257 is being performed. Is also possible. However, in this configuration, it is difficult to distinguish between a case where a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258 and a case where the above fraudulent act is being performed. In contrast, when a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258, the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become the HI level signal. Therefore, in the situation where the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 is maintained at the HI level signal as described above, the special situation where the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become the LOW level signal despite the specific timing. It is possible to distinguish between a case where a failure has occurred in the payout motor 257 and the payout ball detection sensor 258 and a case where the above fraud is being performed. .

  In order to prevent the CPU 331 from specifying that the game ball has been paid out when the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 becomes an HI level signal due to the influence of noise or the like, the CPU 331 outputs an HI level signal. Is specified using the payout specifying counter area 380 of the RAM 333, it is determined that the game ball has been paid out. In this case, the timing for specifying that a special situation has occurred is measured using the payout specifying counter area 380. Thereby, the above-described excellent effect can be obtained while suppressing the complexity of the software configuration and the hardware configuration.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (1) As shown in FIG. 67, the configuration relating to the abnormality monitoring of the payout device 224 in each of the above embodiments is supplied with power (backup power) from the power interruption unit 321c to the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322. It may be applied to a pachinko machine.

  In this case, the configuration relating to the output of the prize ball command from the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 may be different from the above embodiments. For example, the CPU 311 of the main control board 301 may be configured to output a winning ball command to the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 every time a game ball winning to the general winning opening 82 or the variable winning device 83 is specified. Even a pachinko machine having the above-described configuration is assumed to be fraudulent with respect to the payout device 224. Therefore, the configuration relating to monitoring of abnormality of the payout device 224 in each of the above embodiments may be applied.

  When the configuration relating to the abnormality monitoring of the payout device 224 in the third embodiment or the sixth embodiment is applied to the pachinko machine, the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 receives the input prize ball command. Basically, it is kept in the ring buffer, and only a small number of prize ball commands such as one or two prize ball commands stored in the ring buffer are awarded in the prize ball number storage area 374. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of prize balls is added to the number-of-balls storage area 374. In this case, it is possible to satisfactorily monitor the abnormality of the payout device 224 as in the third embodiment or the sixth embodiment without setting a large number of winning unit counter areas 401.

  (2) The object to which the configuration relating to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 is not limited to the payout device 224 that uses a proximity sensor as the payout ball detection sensor 258, and the payout ball The detection sensor 258 may be applied to a payout device 224 that uses a photo sensor, a limit sensor, or the like. Even if the payout ball detection sensor 258 uses a detection method other than the proximity sensor, an illegal act that prevents the payout ball detection sensor 258 from normally detecting the game ball is assumed. The configuration relating to the monitoring in each of the above embodiments may be applied also to the payout device 224 having the payout ball detection sensor 258. Moreover, if it is the structure regarding the monitoring in said each embodiment, it can apply, without restrict | limiting to a detection system.

  Further, the object to which the configuration relating to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224 is not limited to the payout device 224 using the rotating body 256 and the payout motor 257 as the payout execution means. For example, the present invention may be applied to a payout device 224 that uses a gate piece provided so that a part of the game ball passage 253 appears and disappears as a payout execution unit and a drive unit that causes the gate piece to move in and out.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the number of occurrences of the special situation reaches the abnormality reference number set as a plurality of times, special processing such as setting of the dispensing device abnormal state and abnormality notification is performed. However, instead of this, special processing may be performed when it is specified once that a special situation has occurred. However, a special situation occurs even in the process of retry operation. Therefore, it is preferable that the special process does not prevent the retry operation from being performed. For example, only the abnormality notification may be configured.

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, as a special process, the payout device abnormality state is set and the abnormality notification is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball such as a stop of payout of a game ball It may be configured that only the payout of the game is restricted, may be configured such that only the abnormality notification is performed and the payout of the game ball is not restricted as described above, and the progress of the subsequent game may be prohibited. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs arbitrary combinations of said each aspect as special processing.

  (5) In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the special processing is executed when the number of consecutive occurrences of the special situation reaches two times. However, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the special process may be executed when the number of consecutive occurrences reaches a predetermined number of times of 3, 4, or 5 or more.

  (6) In the second embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the number of occurrences of the special situation grasped by any one of the detection abnormality counter areas 391 and 392 reaches three times as the abnormality reference number. In this case, the special process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the abnormality reference number may be two. In this case, the number of detection abnormality counter areas may be one, and the number of timer counter areas may be one accordingly. Further, the abnormality reference number may be four. In this case, the number of detection abnormality counter areas may be three, and the number of timer counter areas may be three in accordance with this. Also, the abnormality reference number may be 5 or more. Further, the numbers of detection abnormality counter areas and timer counter areas may be the number corresponding to the abnormality reference number, or not less than the number corresponding to the abnormality reference number, instead of “abnormal reference number—1”.

  In the second embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the determination reference period is set to about 2 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination reference period is set to less than 2 seconds, such as 1 second. Alternatively, the period may be longer than 2 seconds, such as 3 seconds. Further, the determination reference period may be measured not by the timer counter area but by the real time clock.

  Also, instead of measuring the reference period for determination starting from the occurrence of a special situation, the measurement of the reference period for determination is started at another timing such as the timing when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The detection abnormality counter area may be initialized every time measurement for the reference period for measurement is completed, and measurement of the reference period for determination may be restarted.

  (7) In the third embodiment and the sixth embodiment, special processing is performed when the number of occurrences of the special situation grasped by the detection abnormality counter area 379 reaches twice as the abnormality reference number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the abnormality reference number may be three times, four times, or five times or more.

  (8) In the first to third embodiments, a special situation occurs when the detection result of the payout ball detection sensor 258 does not become a detection result corresponding to the specification of the payout of the game ball and the specific timing is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special situation occurs when a specific timing is reached in a situation where the detection signal of the dispensing ball detection sensor 258 does not become the HI level signal. It is also possible to specify that a special situation has occurred when the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 reaches a specific timing in a situation where the detection signal from the HI level signal does not become a LOW level signal. That is, the “specific detection result” does not need to be the same as the detection result specified by the CPU 331 that the game ball has been paid out.

  (9) In the first to third embodiments, the value of the drive counter area 378 corresponding to the specific timing that specifies that a special situation has occurred is limited to that in each of the above embodiments. Rather, it is optional as long as it is earlier than the timing at which the retry operation is executed and later than the timing at which the game ball payout is normally specified. The same applies to the timing of performing the retry operation.

  (10) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, the value of the payout specifying counter area 380 corresponding to the specific timing for specifying that a special situation has occurred is limited to that in each of the above embodiments. The timing is arbitrary as long as it is earlier than the timing at which the retry operation is executed and later than the timing at which the game ball is normally specified.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, the drive counter area 378, the detection abnormality counter areas 379, 391, 392, the payout specifying counter area 380, the timer counter areas 393, 394, the winning unit counter area 401, the rental unit counter area The measurement using each counter area 402 may be either an addition type or a subtraction type as long as the CPU 331 can perform processing using each counter area satisfactorily.

  (12) As a configuration relating to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224, in addition to or instead of those in the above embodiments, drive control of the payout motor 257 by the CPU 331 of the payout control board 322 is started. Based on the fact that the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor (payout detection means) 258 becomes the HI level signal (medium detection information) at a timing prior to being issued, a special setting such as setting of an abnormal state of the payout device and an abnormality notification It is good also as a structure which performs a process. When an illegal act is attempted to receive a lot of game balls by maintaining the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 at the HI level signal using a fraudulent jig, drive control of the payout motor 257 is started. It is considered that the detection signal of the payout ball detection sensor 258 is maintained at the HI level signal by using a fraud jig at a timing prior to being performed. If this happens, it can be dealt with appropriately.

  (13) As a configuration relating to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 224, the number of times that the CPU 331 specifies that a game ball has been paid out is used instead of the one in each of the above embodiments. Based on the fact that the number of times specified that a special situation has occurred within the range until the reference number is reached has reached the abnormal reference number, the special processing such as setting of the dispensing device abnormal state and abnormality notification is executed. Also good.

  (14) As a configuration relating to monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the dispensing device 224, the following configuration may be applied in addition to or instead of the configuration in each of the above embodiments. That is, the shape of the passage leading from the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage 231 to the dispensing device 224 may be configured to make it difficult to insert a fraudulent jig into the dispensing device 224 from the downstream side. For example, a right-angled bent portion or an acute-angled bent portion may be formed at an intermediate position in the passage leading to the dispensing device 224. In addition, when the passage section is square, it is considered that a gap is likely to occur between the game ball and the inner surface of the passage when the game ball passes through the passage. You may make it difficult to produce a clearance gap.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the award ball number storage area 374, the rented ball number storage area 375 and the payout number counter area 376 of the RAM 333 of the payout control board 322 include information representing the number of game balls in binary numbers. However, instead of this, information representing the number of game balls by a number other than a binary number such as a decimal number may be stored. In addition, in these areas 374 to 376, indirect information is stored instead of storing information directly representing the number of game balls, and the indirect information is compared with table information stored in advance in the ROM 332 or the like. It is good also as a structure which specifies the number of game balls by doing.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, by arranging a plurality of combinations of the payout motor 257 and the rotating body 256, the payout speed of the game ball may be different from that in each of the above embodiments. A configuration may be adopted in which game balls are paid out simultaneously. In this case, in the first to third embodiments, the specific timing for specifying that a special situation has occurred, that is, specifying that a special situation has occurred, in accordance with the payout speed of the game ball. It is necessary to change the value of the drive counter area 378.

  (17) For the pachinko machine in which the retry operation is not performed in the payout device 224 and instead the payout of the game ball is stopped and the payout speed of the game ball is extremely slow, the payout device 224 in each of the above embodiments is A configuration related to abnormality monitoring may be applied.

  (18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the prize ball information corresponding to the prize is added each time a prize is generated and the prize ball information is stored in the main RAM 313, and the prize ball is outputted each time a prize ball command is output. The prize ball information corresponding to the command is subtracted, but if the prize ball information can be specified by the main CPU 311, the relationship between the addition and the subtraction may be reversed.

  In addition, regarding the storage of information on the number of prize balls in the payout side RAM 333, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command is added based on the input of the prize ball command, and the number of prize balls is calculated each time a game ball is paid out. Although the subtracting configuration is adopted, if the payout-side CPU 331 can specify the information on the number of prize balls, the relationship between the addition and the subtraction may be reversed.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, a prize ball permission signal is input to the first input port 351 of the main CPU 311. Instead, the first input port 351 is connected to the game area. You may make it not input signals other than the provided ball | bowl detection sensors 152-155. In this case, unlike the above embodiments, when the number of ball detection sensors 152 to 155 provided for the game area is 8, all the signals of these ball detection sensors 152 to 155 are first input. It may be input to the port 351. The functions of the first input port 351 and the second input port 352 are provided as driver ICs separately from the main CPU 311 chip. The main CPU 311 has a single input / output port (multi-bit configuration) or input port ( In the configuration in which a multi-bit configuration is provided, the prize ball permission signal is not input to the driver IC having the function as the first input port 351 but is input to the driver IC having the function as the second input port 352. It is good also as a structure.

  (20) The power interruption power is not supplied to the area for storing the number of prize balls in the payout side RAM 333, but the power interruption power may be supplied to the area for storing information related to security. Even in this case, the cost can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the power at the time of power interruption is supplied to both the area for storing the number of prize balls and the area for storing information on security in the payout side RAM 333.

  (21) The main control board 301 and the payout control board 322 may be configured to input / output information by optical communication instead of inputting / outputting information by an electrical signal. Further, the present invention is not limited to wired communication, and may be configured to input / output information by wireless communication using radio waves or infrared rays.

  (22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 10 including the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 as the outer storage unit, but instead, a single outer storage unit is provided. The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine. In this case, the full tank detection sensor 59 is provided so as to detect whether or not the single outer reservoir is full. When it is specified that the outer reservoir is full, the game ball is paid out. To limit.

  (23) In each of the above embodiments, the power failure monitoring device may be provided separately from the main control device 162 so that the main control board 301 has a function of only the main control circuit 302.

  (24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound lamp control device 143 controls the display control device 325. Alternatively, the display control device 325 may control the sound lamp control device 143. . Further, a single control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 325 may be provided.

  (25) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like. Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine where gaming balls are not lent through the ball lending device Y.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. In this case, the configuration relating to the abnormality monitoring of the dispensing device 224 in each of the above embodiments may be applied to the hopper device of the slot machine.

  Also, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that have a take-in device and start rotation of the reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which is integrated. In particular, it is more effective when the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that can start the next game round even in a situation where the payout of game balls is not completed.

  (26) The configurations described in the first to sixth embodiments and the other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. For example, the payout device 224 in the first embodiment may be applied. The configuration relating to monitoring of abnormalities of the payout device and the configuration relating to monitoring of abnormalities of the payout device 224 in the fourth embodiment may be applied in combination, and the monitoring of abnormalities in the payout device 224n in the second embodiment may be applied. You may apply combining a structure and the structure regarding the abnormality monitoring of the payout apparatus 224 in the said 6th Embodiment. In addition, for each of the first to sixth embodiments, or a configuration in which some or all of the first to sixth embodiments are combined with each other, each of the other embodiments described above. You may apply combining a part or all of a structure mutually.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 33 ... Upper plate as storage part, 34 ... Lower plate as storage part, 256 ... Rotating body constituting payout execution means, 257 ... Payout motor constituting payout execution means, 258 DESCRIPTION OF REFERENCE SYMBOLS: Discharged ball detection sensor 301: Main control board 311, CPU, 313 ... RAM, 322 ... Discharge control board, 331 ... CPU, 333 ... RAM, 334 ... Motor driver, 361 ... Counter area for prize ball, 374 ... Award Number of balls storage area, 375 ... Number of rented balls storage area, 378 ... Drive counter area, 379 ... Detection abnormality counter area, 380 ... Dispensing specifying counter area, 391 ... First detection abnormality counter area, 392 ... Second detection abnormality counter Area, 393: first timer counter area, 394: second timer counter area, 401: winning unit counter area 402 ... lend sphere unit counter area.

Claims (1)

A payout execution means for paying out game media toward a storage section provided in the front portion of the gaming machine;
It is provided so as to detect game media paid out from the payout execution means toward the storage unit, and detects the game media while detecting the game media while not detecting the game media. A payout detection means for setting the detection state to the medium detection state,
Payout number information storage means for storing payout number information used as information on the number of game media to be paid out;
Drive control means for drivingly controlling the payout execution means so that the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the payout number information storage means is paid out;
Based on the fact that the detection state of the payout detection means has changed from the medium non-detection state to the medium detection state, it is determined that the game medium has been paid out from the payout execution means, and the game medium has been paid out Updating means for updating the number-of-payout information so that it is reflected in the number-of-payout information when it is specified;
In a situation in which the payout execution means is driven and controlled by the drive control means so as to perform a payout operation, the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium non-detection despite the predetermined first timing. A payout restricting means for restricting the payout of game media by the payout executing means when a situation that does not change from the state to the medium detection state occurs;
In the situation where the detection state of the payout detection means is the medium detection state, the detection state of the payout detection means is medium non-detection despite the second timing set as a timing earlier than the first timing. A special situation identifying means for identifying that a special situation that is not in a state occurs,
Number-of-times measuring means for measuring the number of times the special situation has occurred;
An initial value setting means for setting information on the number of times measured by the number of times measurement means to an initial value when a reference period has elapsed;
Means for performing special processing based on the fact that the number of times measured by the number of times measuring means has reached a reference number of times determined as a plurality of times;
Equipped with a,
The initial value setting means is measured by the number counting means even if an event occurs in which the detection state of the payout detection means changes from the medium detection state to the medium non-detection state before the second timing. A gaming machine characterized in that information on the number of times is not set to the initial value .

Images